BPC430_Col95

BPC430 SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation: Planning and Reporting SAP CPM

Date Training Center Instructors Education Website

Participant Handbook Course Version: 95 Course Duration: 5 Day(s) Material Number: 50100078

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright Copyright © 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

Trademarks •

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

•

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

•

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.

•

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

•

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

•

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

•

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

•

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

•

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g201091111333

About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options. Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external.

2010

Example text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.

Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.

© 2010 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii

About This Handbook

BPC430

Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon

Meaning For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point Exception or caution Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's presentation.

iv


2010

Contents Course Overview ............................................................................. vii Course Goals.................................................................................vii Course Objectives ...........................................................................vii

Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation - Overview ..............1 SAP Business Objects Planning and Consolidation Overview ......................... 2

Unit 2: The Interface for Excel ............................................................. 27 The Interface for Excel .................................................................... 28

Unit 3: Range Based Reporting - EvDRE ............................................... 95 Range Based Reporting - EVDRE ....................................................... 97

Unit 4: Planning ..............................................................................275 BPC Planning .............................................................................. 276

Unit 5: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting ........................................ 411 EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting ................................................. 412

Unit 6: Drill Through ........................................................................463 Drill Through................................................................................ 464

Unit 7: Business Process Flows ......................................................... 511 Using Business Process Flows ......................................................... 512

Unit 8: Xcelsius Integration ...............................................................583 Xcelsius Integration ....................................................................... 584

Unit 9: Word and Powerpoint Integration ..............................................669 The Interface for Word and PowerPoint ................................................ 670

Unit 10: Interface for the Web ............................................................687 Interface for the Web ...................................................................... 688

2010


v

Contents

BPC430

Unit 11: Appendix ...........................................................................735 Appendix: GRC ............................................................................ 736

Index ............................................................................................751

vi


2010

Course Overview Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: • • • • •

Application Consultants Project leaders Project team members Report writers Technical pre-sales

Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge •

Excel

Recommended Knowledge •

Experience with OLAP products

Course Goals This course will prepare you to: • • • •

Understand the system architecture and integration. Discuss all the options for reporting, manual, and automatic planning. Understand the options to use Logic for planning and reporting. Use business process flows for planning.

Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • •

2010

Understand the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation concepts and components. Work with the delivered wizard templates.


vii

Course Overview

• • • • • • • •

viii

BPC430

Use the 'evdre' range based function. Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. Set up and run drill throughs. Use the spread, trend, and weight planning functions. Work with the Interfaces for Excel, Web, Word, and PowerPoint. Build and use Xcelsius dashboards for the purpose of integrating with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Configure the comments feature. Work with the MNU commands.


2010

Unit 1 SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation - Overview Unit Overview This unit will give you an overview of SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • •

Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features. Know what delivered components you can leverage. Learn the key terms.

Unit Contents Lesson: SAP Business Objects Planning and Consolidation Overview ........ 2

2010


1

Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation - Overview

BPC430

Lesson: SAP Business Objects Planning and Consolidation Overview Lesson Overview Let's discuss the key features of the product.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features. Know what delivered components you can leverage. Learn the key terms.

Business Example You need an understanding of what is involved in the planning and reporting process and what features and delivered content can be used to meet your requirements.

Overview

Figure 1: The Value of Business Planning and Consolidation

2


2010

BPC430

Lesson: SAP Business Objects Planning and Consolidation Overview

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation provides everything you need to meet your bottom-up and top-down financial and operational planning requirements, as well as complete consolidation and reporting through a single application and user interface. There are two versions of the software: a version for the Microsoft platform and a version for SAP NetWeaver. With Planning and Consolidation reporting, you can retrieve requested data from the database into an Excel interface. You can analyze your multidimensional data using the current view, which is available on the action pane. The system provides a variety of report templates to which you can add common formulas to design your own reports. Here are some of the business issues and enablers that you can leverage.

Figure 2: Pain points by stakeholder

This benchmark data should make you feel good about your investment.

2010


3


BPC430

Figure 3: Gartner

Business users accept the user interfaces very well.

Figure 4: Familiar and Easy to Use

4


2010

BPC430


Figure 5: Setup by IT – Owned and Maintained by Business Users

Figure 6: Integrated

Using Excel that is integrated to a central database is a key feature.

2010


5


BPC430

Figure 7: Single Integrated 'Application'

The BW based solution features key integration points.

Figure 8: NetWeaver Technology Platform

Business process flows can be used as a user interface that makes it easy to check the status of a process and it also 'guides' the user through the application.

6


2010

BPC430


Figure 9: Process-Centric

Figure 10: BPF Monitor – Group by Region

2010


7


BPC430

Figure 11: Available Interfaces

Figure 12: Architecture

8


2010

BPC430


Figure 13: Overview: Architecture – Appsets

Commenting Features

Figure 14: Submitting Comments

2010


9


BPC430

Figure 15: The Architecture of Centrally Stored Comments

BW Integration

Figure 16: Drill Through

10


2010

BPC430


Figure 17: ECC Integration: GL Balance Drill Through – Line Item Display

Integration Features

Figure 18: Xcelsius Read/Write Dashboard

2010


11


BPC430

Figure 19: Xcelsius Read/Write: Planning Tab

Figure 20: High Performance Array Based Reports

This tool allows you to quickly create a report by selecting the dimensions you want in the columns and rows, as well as a few more report details.

12


2010

BPC430


A default report contains one expansion on the columns using the Time dimension, one expansion on the rows using the Account dimension, and the MemberSet Self,Dep. You can use the following options for modifying the default report: •

• • • • • •

•

•

2010

Available dimensions – Lists the dimensions that are available in the active application. You can select one or more dimensions and place them on the 'In columns' and 'In rows' fields using the arrow icons. In columns – Lists the dimensions that are placed in the column axis of the report. Use the up and down arrows to change the nesting order. In rows – Lists the dimensions that are placed in the row axis of the report. Use the up and down arrows to change the nesting order. Spread across worksheets – Lists the dimension that has its members enumerated across the worksheets. Member selection – Displays the memberset for the dimensions. Allow expansions – Automatically triggers an expansion in the report. Allow options – Generates an Options range. An Option Range is a range of cells in which you can define your EvDRE options. Alternatively, you can enumerate the options in a comma-delimited list in the Options field. Allow formatting – Allows you to choose a default formatting style generated automatically, or import the style from a predefined workbook (either local or server-based). Select this option to use the format section to customize the format of the template. Allow sorting – Inserts a sorting range into the worksheet. You can have the system automatically insert a break total into the worksheet, and choose to display the values in descending order.


13


BPC430

Figure 21: Delivered Dynamic Report Templates

Figure 22: ApShell

It is highly recommended that the delivered ApShell not be modified. Instead, ApShell should be utilized as a template for all customized Application Sets. ApShell contains the correct formatted property values required for many of SAP Business Planning and Consolidations delivered functionality. Re-creating these property based inter-relationships is highly complex and is likely to fail without deep technical knowledge of the requirements.

14


2010

BPC430


ApShell Content: • • • • • • • • • • •

Starting Meta/Master Data to function basic Planning and Consolidation Dimensions with Dimension Properties Sample Dimension members with their property values Planning and Rate Applications with transactional data Baseline Application Set Parameters and Application Parameters Sample Task and Member Access Profiles Data Manager Packages Script Logics Examples Business Rules Examples Reporting/Input Schedule Dynamic Templates File Directories

Figure 23: Starter kit for Liquidity Planning

2010


15


BPC430

Figure 24: IFRS Starter Kit

Comments provide a vehicle for submitting, storing, and retrieving text commentary associated with SAP Business Planning and Consolidation (Business Planning and Consolidation) data cells. This allows users to annotate data so other users can view supporting information associated with a particular data point.

16


2010

BPC430


Figure 25: Key Terms

Figure 26: Terminology: Application Sets

• •

2010

ApShell is the delivered application set used as a starting point for client implementations. No objects within an AppSet are shared with other AppSets.


17


BPC430

Figure 27: Terminology: Dimensions (Master Data)

If there is no hierarchy in the dimension, the dimension is considered to be a “Flat” dimension. If a hierarchy exists, the dimension is considered to be a “Hierarchical” dimension.

Figure 28: Terminology: Properties

18


2010

BPC430


In this example, the account Dimension has a member ExtSales with the property values: • • • •

Description = External Sales Group = Profit & Loss Scaling = Y AccType = Inc

Figure 29: Terminology: Measures

Measures – time-related views of transaction data, such as Period, Quarter to data, and Year to date. ApShell measures are: Periodic, Quarter To Date, and Year To Date. The accounts above are cumulative in nature since you can add up operating income over time. Most source systems store balances on a periodic basis (whether it is daily, weekly, monthly, fiscal periods, etc). With this method, periodic data must be accumulated for year-to-date reporting (except for Balance Sheet accounts, which gets the value from the last period). However, in some business cases, calculations should occur on a year-to-date basis. If YTD is required, applications can store the data on a YTD basis.

2010


19


BPC430

When data is entered into YTD, its periodic values used for reporting purposes, are calculated as the difference between the current period and the last period (again, Balance Sheet accounts would simply take the value from the last period). One can decide to store data in YTD or on a Periodic basis setting the AppSet Parameters.

Figure 30: Terminology: Transaction Data

Transaction Data is stored in Applications (Cubes). Note: Every dimension in the cube has a dimension member posted in every record and each one is a base level member. Base level members don't have children.

Figure 31: Terminology: Applications

20


2010

BPC430


This slide illustrates the correlation between the SAP NetWeaver objects and applications/dimensions from SAP Business Planning and Consolidation. An SAP Business Planning and Consolidation application can be described as being similar to an InfoCube in SAP NetWeaver. • • •

In SAP NetWeaver, the different types of objects that can be used to store data (or report on views of data) are called InfoProviders. One type of InfoProvider is an InfoCube (or just cube for short). InfoCubes are where data is stored in SAP NetWeaver BW, in an extended star schema.

In SAP NetWeaver, the different types of objects that can be used to store data (or report on views of data) are called InfoProviders. One type of InfoProvider is an InfoCube (or just cube for short). InfoCubes are where data is stored in SAP NetWeaver BW, in an extended star schema. This slide contains information about SAP NetWeaver terminology.

Figure 32: BW and SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Key Terms

2010


21


BPC430

Figure 33: InfoObjects (Fields)

22


2010

BPC430


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features. • Know what delivered components you can leverage. • Learn the key terms.

2010


23

Unit Summary

BPC430

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Identify the most important Business Planning and Consolidation features. • Know what delivered components you can leverage. • Learn the key terms.

24


2010

Unit Summary

25

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

26

BPC430


2010

Unit 2 The Interface for Excel Unit Overview Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • •

Work with the Interface for Excel. Learn about the current view features. Understand how to use delivered templates. Save your own dynamic templates. Work with Park N' Go. Use the drilldown feature. Discover how the memberset keywords can be used to control your expansions.

Unit Contents Lesson: The Interface for Excel.................................................... 28 Exercise 1: The Excel Interface ............................................... 59 Exercise 2: Membersets & Drill Downs....................................... 79

2010


27

Unit 2: The Interface for Excel

BPC430

Lesson: The Interface for Excel Lesson Overview In this lesson we will get to know the Excel Interface.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • • • •

Work with the Interface for Excel. Learn about the current view features. Understand how to use delivered templates. Save your own dynamic templates. Work with Park N' Go. Use the drilldown feature. Discover how the memberset keywords can be used to control your expansions.

Business Example Now that your company or client has implemented SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation, you need to learn how to work in the Interface for Excel. You need to know all about the action pane, the 'E' menu's, the current view, expansion options, delivered templates as so forth.

The Excel Interface The Excel Interface can be accessed in a number of ways. In any of the applications such as the Admin Console, Word, or Powerpoint, use the links in 'Available Interfaces' for example. When accessing these interfaces, the Connection Wizard may be needed. Use the Connection Wizard in the following scenarios: • •

• •

28

The first time you log on to the system, so you can establish default connection settings When you want to log on to the system with a different user ID and password than your default credentials or the ID and password you supplied the last time you logged on When you want to connect to a different server than your default server or the last server you logged on to When a new application set has been added, and you want to access it


2010

BPC430

Lesson: The Interface for Excel

You must know the following information to use the connection wizard: Server name or IP address Domain name, if your system requires it.

Figure 34: Accessing the connection wizard

Figure 35: The connection wizard (your server #### will be assigned by your intructor)

2010


29


BPC430

Figure 36: Reporting (Interfaces)

Business Planning and Consolidation 7.0, version for Netweaver combines the power of BPC with the rich functionality of Microsoft Excel, Word and PowerPoint. With BPC for Office, you have all of the Microsoft functionality you are used to, plus, your worksheets, documents, and slide shows can be linked directly to the BPC database that houses your company's reporting data.

30


2010

BPC430


Figure 37: The Action Pane

Logon The logon section shows the active user ID and the application set. To change the application set, select the link, make your selection, then click OK. Current View (CV) This section controls which application within the selected application set is taken and which members, parent members, or top level members are represented in the active report or input schedule. It allows you to dynamically change the current view by entering various members, or selecting them from the Member Lookup. All the dimensions and members to which you have access are available, when the section is expanded. Note: You can clear your user history of dimension members via: Planning & Consolidation → eTools → Client options... → Clear current view.

2010


31


BPC430

Figure 38: Session Information and the expanded current view

Figure 39: Expanded Current View

Below you can see the Excel 2007 ribbon with the Planning & Consolidation add in. It also features a log off option to disconnect from the server.

32


2010

BPC430


If you use 7.5 with Excel 2003, there is no ribbon but the add in still works. If you use 7.0 with Excel 2007 or 2010, the add in works but the ribbon is not used. Expand all refreshes data from the database will execute any new report settings. Refresh workbook only refreshes the data. You can set a template to refresh by default in the workbook options. Note: The eData option is not shown below.

Figure 40: BPC for Excel Ribbon

2010


33


BPC430

Figure 41: Options for 'eTools'

All dimensions in the application appear in the current view. Every dimension must have a member selected. It could be either a parent or base level member. A base level member does not have any children. Multiple single values or ranges are not allowed.

34


2010

BPC430


Figure 42: The Current View and Access to the Member Lookup

Figure 43: Turning on the Double Click Feature

The Current View is user dependent, therefore you will only be able to view information that your member access profile allows. The Member Lookup can be accessed if you click at the technical names of the relevant dimension within the Current View. A further possibility is via: ETools → Select Members. Then select your dimension. A third possibility would be if you are in an open Report Template or Input Schedule and you execute a right mouse click at any place you will find the menu point “Select Members”.

2010


35


BPC430

Figure 44: The Member Lookup 1/2

To select a member 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Open the Member Lookup dialog box. Select Hierarchy to view the members in hierarchical view, or Table to see the members in a flat list. Select how you want to view details on members: ID Only, Description Only, Member ID and Description. Search for the desired member. You can use the Filters tab to search on specific properties, the Find Members link to search for specific member names, or use the Show Property field to display members that use a specific property. If you define a filter, the members will always be shown in table view (not hierarchy view). Highlight the member in the list, then click OK. You can select members by double-clicking them if an option is set in the Member Selection Options.

The check mark means that the member has been copied to the clipboard for pasting into a spreadsheet.

36


2010

BPC430


Figure 45: The Member Lookup 2/2

You can filter the member list based on member properties. To filter by properties 1. 2. 3. 4.

From the Member Lookup, make sure the Filtering area is displayed. Select the 'Use the Filter' check box. From the Filter area, select one or more properties on the left, and property values on the right. Click Refresh.

To stop filtering for a dimension, clear the 'Use the Filter' check box. Another method to select members: eTools → Select members. The product comes delivered with 10 EVDRE reporting dynamic templates. These are typically used for ad hoc reporting and training.

2010


37


BPC430

Figure 46: Delivered Planning & Reporting Templates

Templates can be easily modified by changing the report definition in the 'control panel'. The control panel is in the hidden columns and rows on the upper left. This is where you can select different dimensions for the rows and columns for example. When you make a change, just select the 'Expand All' button to re-run the report.

Figure 47: The Control Panel

38


2010

BPC430


If you want to save the workbook with your modifications, one way it to select: eTools → Save dynamic templates.

Figure 48: Saving Reports and Input Schedules

Template1.XLT to Template10.XLT in the Wizard Folder of the Server (“Company”) represent the files of the delivered reports. The same for Company → Input Schedules → Wizard. Here you would find 5 delivered templates called Template1.XLT to Template5.XLT. The upper slide shows the delivered reports from the Report Wizard perspective. Each of the reports in the Report Wizard has a title, a legend, a bitmap icon and an xlt file for the report itself. Each of the delivered templates can be modified changing the Control Panel settings. It's possible that the Administrator creates new templates and adds them to the Template Wizard.

2010


39


40

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Figure 49: How to add a dynamic wizard template

• •

Dynamic templates, and the files associated with them, are stored via transaction code (on the BW Application Sever) UJFS. Each template file is associated with a dynamic template by: – –

•

Saving the template file to the Wizard folder. Numbering the template file so that it corresponds with the correct line in the Description.txt file, using the following naming convention: TemplateN.xlt. – N is the template number in your list, and must correspond with the row in the Description.txt file. You could create a new template using an existing one taken from the Report Wizard and adapt it and save it to the Company → Reports → Wizard folder. If you do so you are asked if you want to increase the Template Version. Here you will have to select yes. It's also possible to manually increase the template version “+1” in BPC Administration → Manage application sets → set template version.

•

Each bitmap file is associated with a dynamic template by: – – –

•

•

Saving the bitmap file to the Wizard folder. Numbering the bitmap file so that it corresponds with the correct row in the Description.txt file, using the following naming convention: ImageN.bmp. N is the template number in your list, and must correspond with the row in the Description.txt file.

The name and description of each template is stored in the Description.txt file: – First field: Template name - can contain spaces and special characters. – Second field: TAB separator. – Third field: Template description. – Separate each template row by hitting [enter]. As a result you can see the new Template in the Report or Input Schedule Wizard depending where you stored your Templates, either to the Company → Input Schedule → Wizard node or the Company → Report → Wizard node.

BPC templates are saved in only two places in general: Your hard drive and on the BPC server. You can use the eAnalyze and eSubmit menu if you want to save them on your hard drive.

2010


41


BPC430

In the eTools menu you can both save on the hard drive (LOCAL) or on the server (COMPANY). The upper slide shows one delivered Input Schedules in Business Planning and Consolidation 7.0, version for SAP Netweaver. Delivered Templates

Figure 50: Delivered Dynamic Report Templates

You may be able to used the delivered templates for some ad hoc reporting or training. Here's an example of the Nested Row report which features two dimensions in the rows:

42


2010

BPC430


Figure 51: Nested Row - Result

These are the standard delivered reports that are great for ad hoc reporting. In NW, there are 10 delivered templates: • • •

•

• • • • • •

2010

Subtotals by Account: Accounts with subtotals are in the rows and any dimension across in columns. Consolidating: Any dimension in rows and entity members across the columns with a hierarchy. Variance: Any dimension in rows and category comparison in columns. It also features variances, calculation of both amount and percentage with both YTD and Periodic boxes. Comparison with Prior Year: Any dimension in rows and category comparison in columns and also retrieves the last year same period data with both YTD and Periodic boxes. Comparison with 3 Year: Year over Year comparisons. Drill in Place: Performs drill in place. Sort On Values: Sorts by total value. Sort On Members: Sorts on members. Nested Rows: Allows any two dimensions to be nested in the rows and a third dimension in the column. Drill Across Dimensions: Allows you to drill from one dimension to another in the rows.


43


BPC430

You can modify the generic reports to meet your requirements and then save it without affecting the global template. This is why they call them 'Templates'. You can save a report locally to the My Reports folder by choosing Save to My Reports folder in the Report State action pane. You can save a report as a template by selecting eTools Save Template Library (you must have authorization for this task). After a template is saved as a template, you can make it available for downloading to other users' machines by updating the template version number. Note: We'll talk about the delivered input templates in the planning unit. Note: These all use EVDRE.

Figure 52: Configure the Layout

The Control Panel of all delivered templates is divided into two parts: • •

Page Members & Formatting EVDRE Ranges and Expansions.

You can prohibit access to the control panel via eTools → Workbook Options → Set Worksheet Password. This security is turned off via the normal Excel worksheet security.

44


2010

BPC430


Page Members & Formatting has the following functions: • •

Member Label gives the description of the dimension member. Override Member allows you to freeze dimension members independent of the selection in the current view. By default, the Member, and data retrieved or sent, are based on your current view settings. – –

However, if you want a static report, you can freeze the current view setting for any/all dimensions in the Override Member area of the Control Panel. However, when the user changes the CV, only the unfrozen members will be changed!

You can type in single members in the “Override Member” area which are either parents or children. Multiple values are not allowed. The table “Criteria, Evaluation, Format, use, Parameters, Apply to” is for formatting of the template. We will go into detail here later. To hard a member for a workbook, enter the member id into the 'override member' area.

Figure 53: Member Override

If you do hard code a member in the override area, you may then want to disable the current view for that dimension so the users are not misled.

2010


45


BPC430

Figure 54: Freeze Dimension Settings

If you freeze dimensions in the Control Panel it would be a good idea to not allow users to change the Current View. The parameter MEMBERSET defines the set of members to expand for the corresponding dimension. You can define one or more of the following for this parameter: • • •

A comma-delimited list of members, for example, Cash,AccRec,Inventory. A valid keyword that describes the members relative to the corresponding dimension member specified in the PageKeyRange. A filter that describes the members to return. Note: Do not add any spaces between the values.

The upper table describes the valid keywords that you can use alone, or combine with other keywords and hard-coded members in a comma-delimited list. The default expansion order is children, then parent. If you combine the keywords MEMBERS or ALL with PARENTAFTER, the parent members appear after the children. The upper table continues with the MEMBERSET OPTIONS.

46


2010

BPC430


Figure 55: Park N Go

Park N Go is invoked automatically when you save input schedules on your local machine. In BPC for Excel, open the input schedule you want to save, then select eSubmit → Save My Schedule. If you have not locked down the data, a message is displayed. To lock down your data, click Yes. The Park N Go dialog box is displayed. Select Lock down current view only or Lock down data and current view, then click OK.

Drilldown and Membersets The memberset options determine what members appear in the rows and columns of your report. Most memberset keywords such as BAS use the current view. BASMEMBERS for example does not consider the current at all as you can see in the table below. Let's get warmed up on this concept by looking at few examples. This first one is using a current setting for time of 2009.TOTAL and a basemember keyword of 'BAS':

2010


47


BPC430

Figure 56: BAS example

If you ever need to see whether a member has children or not, you can look at its properties. The 'calc' property will show 'N'. Of course, knowing how to look at a members properties can come in handy in other situations as well.

Figure 57: A base members properties.

This next example shows that you can actually type in a memberset just in case it isn't available in the drop down.

48


2010

BPC430


Figure 58: DEP,SELF (typed in)

In this next example, you can see how to override the current view by using a keyword such as BAS(2008.Q1) while the current view is set to 2009.TOTAL. Can see how flexible it is? Of course, this could be a little confusing so please keep in mind that many end users will never even see the control panel.

Figure 59: BAS(2008.Q1) with current view = 2009.TOTAL

2010


49


BPC430

Memberset Options

• • • •

If the Current View is set to:

If the Memberset is set to:

What shows up in the report:

2009.TOTAL

DEP

2009.Q1 - 4

2009.TOTAL

BAS

2009.JAN - DEC

2009.TOTAL

BAS,SELF

2009.JAN - DEC, 2009.TOTAL @BOTTOM

2009.TOTAL

SELF,BAS

2009.JAN - DEC, 2009.TOTAL @ TOP

ANY

BASMEMBERS

ALL BASE LEVEL MEMBERS IN THE TIME DIMENSION

2009.TOTAL

LDEP(1)

2009.Q1 - 4

2009.TOTAL

LDEP(2)

2009.Q1 JAN-MAR ETC.

MEMBERS - all members of a dimension. BASMEMBERS - all base members of a dimension. BAS - base level members below a parent in the current view or page key range. DEP - all children of the current view member. You can also enter DEP(parent) to return the members of a specified parent. Note: If the memberset is DEP and the current view is a base level member, no members will be selected.

• • • • • • • • • •

50

ALL - all descendants of a current view member. SELF - the current view member. LDEP(n) - all dependants down # levels. LALL(n) - all descendants down # levels. LBAS(n) - all base level members down # levels. DEP(n) - dependants of n member. ALL(n) - descendants of n member. BAS(n) - leaves of n member. NOEXPAND - converts a dynamic dimension into a static one. GDEP, GBAS, GALL - relate to the dynamic hierarchy editor and can only be used if the application has a GROUP dimension.


2010

BPC430


•

• • •

GDEP - generates the list of entities defined as dependents of the Group set in the page key, as found in the dynamic hierarchy stored in the Ownership cube for the current category and time combinations. This keyword also supports a direct assignment of the Group to use, with the following syntax: GDEP(GroupName). GBAS - selects the group base level members. GALL - selects all members below the current parent. ALL,[,PARENTAFTER] - returns all descendants of a current member. For example ALL(WORLDWIDE2) returns the members of WORLDWIDE2.

Figure 60: The Control Panel

EVDRE Ranges and Functions has several functions. The table on the left hand side allows you: • • • •

to see which application is used at the moment. Here you can see the application “Planning”. to mark some lines or columns as Read only. Format a range according to your corporte identity. FormatRange is linked to the formatting table described before. OptionRange allows to fill in some parameters described in the documentation. For example if you only want to see the description of a line dimension but not the member Id you can fill in the parameter “HIDEROWKEYS”.

The table on the right is very important since you can decide which dimension will be in the Rows and which in the Columns. Doing so you have a very high flexibility using preconfigured templates.

2010


51


BPC430

MEMBERSET is a very interesting feature. It describes if a node, its subnodes and leaves shall be seen or only all leaves to a node without sub-nodes and so on. Before Range and After Range can be used to produce blank lines in a template. These lines can later be used for summing up column data, for formatting and so on. Details can be seen later. Suppress means that columns with zero data should not be seen by the end-user and therefore a suppress condition has to be put in the relevant cells. Insert allows it to input new lines. If you change anything in the Control Panel you must click at the EXPAND ALL button to apply this change to the template. In eTools, you will find the workbook options or click 'Set workbook options' on the Action Pane.

Figure 61: Workbook Options

Templates being used for reading have a workbook type of 'Report' whereas templates being for both read and write have a type of 'Input Schedule'.

52


2010

BPC430


Figure 62: Workbook Options - Workbook Type

Figure 63: Workbook Type and Refresh Options

The upper screenshot shows the Workbook Type and Refresh Options. Workbook Type: Options are Report and Input Schedule.

2010


53


BPC430

Report has read-only quality for all cells and Input Schedule has write quality for all cells. If you need only some cells/columns with read only quality you should set Input Schedule as Workbook Type can control read-only columns via the Get only Range in the Control Panel. When you refresh a workbook, the system goes to the server and returns data values for the cells whose retrieval formulas are affected. When you expand a workbook, the expansion functions dynamically expand dimensional data. Refresh workbook on worksheet update: The system automatically performs a refresh when a change is made to an affected data cell. By default, the system uses this option for reports, not for input schedules. Refresh after data send: The system automatically performs a refresh after data is sent to the database. If not selected, you can perform a manual refresh by selecting eTools → Refresh. By default, the system uses this option for input schedules, not for reports. Expand on workbook open: The system automatically expands the expansion functions when the workbook opens. If you do not select it, you can perform a manual expansion by selecting eTools → Expand All. Expand on CurrentView change: The system automatically expands the expansion functions when the current view is changed. If not selected, you can perform a manual expansion by selecting eTools → Expand All. EVDRE: Refresh by sheet: When you tab from one worksheet to another in an EvDRE report, select this option to refresh each worksheet individually. Unopened worksheets are not refreshed. Allow users to change options: If you select this, nonadministrator users can set workbook options on a workbook. If you leave it blank, only administrators can change these options. By default, this checkbox is selected.

Figure 64: Worksheet Password

54


2010

BPC430


The upper screenshot shows the SET WORKSHEET PASSWORD button.

Figure 65: Override Current View and Save the active session CV with this workbook

The upper screenshot is about the Override Current View configuration and is only relevant if you create a Report or Input Schedule by scratch. In this case the Override Current View item replaces the OverrideMember item in the delivered templates. Save the active session CV with this workbook: allows you to save the active current view with the workbook when you have multiple reports open for which you want to see different current views. Rather than using the active session current view for all three reports, you select, then save the desired current view with each workbook. When you switch between the reports, a unique current view is used for each.

2010


55


BPC430

Figure 66: Lock Status

The Workbook Options dialog shows whether the current workbook is locked or unlocked. You can lock the report or input schedule using the Park N Go feature.

Figure 67: Maximum Expansion Limit

56


2010

BPC430


For performance purposes, this option allows you to set a maximum number of rows and columns to return when the row or column in the report or input schedule dynamically expands. This option allows you to set the maximum at 1000 or 2000, 10,000 or 20,000, or type a desired value. Microsoft Excel has a limit of displaying 65,000 rows. You can set the column maximum at 100, 200, or type a desired value. The Microsoft Excel limit for columns is 256. By default, reports and input schedules are set to return up to 1000 rows, and up to 100 columns. Dynamic expansions include the EvDRE, EvEXP, and EvNXP functions. Note: Excel 2007 does not support additional columns or rows.

Figure 68: Drill Down Options

If you turn 'insert' on and then you drilldown on a parent such as Q1, you'll get the following result:

2010


57


BPC430

Figure 69: Drilldown with 'insert' turned on

This option controls member expansion behavior in the active spreadsheet. You can use Expand by Overwriting Rows or Expand by Inserting Rows. When you select Expand by Overwriting Rows, the expanded members display in the rows below the expanded member, clearing existing members. When you select Expand by Inserting Rows, any rows below the expanded member shift down, and new rows are inserted to accommodate the newly displayed members.

58


2010

BPC430


Exercise 1: The Excel Interface Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Access the Interface for Excel. • Work with the current view. • Become familiar with the delivered templates. • Learn about Park and Go.

Business Example The primary user interface for BPC is Excel. The end users and template developers must be proficient with all of the options at their disposal to meet the user requirements.

Task 1: The Current View Access the interface for Excel. Then we will work with some of the options of the current view member selector which has various filtering options that allow you to easily find dimension members when performing data selections. 1.

Log on to Excel from the Admin console and become familiar with the Interface by expanding the current view, using the hypertext dimension names to select members, turn on the double click selection feature, use the filtering window to select members, and view the eTools options in the 'Planning & Consolidation' Excel ribbon tab.

2.

Now let's learn about the current view and the member selection options.

Task 2: Using and Creating Dynamic Report Templates Working with Dynamic Report Templates. 1.

Set your current view and then use the 'Drill in Place' dynamic report template to build a report. Open the control panel and select only 'BAS' level members in the rows. Note the EVDRE style sheet and also where you can fix dimension members. Run the 'Nested Rows' report template and then the 'Account Trend' input template. Send some data to the data base. Note: Dynamic templates are delivered EVDRE templates that users can easily modify and save. Continued on next page

2010


59


BPC430

Task 3: Dynamic Schedule Templates Working with Dynamic Schedule Templates 1.

Use a dynamic schedule template to build an input schedule. Set you current view to all base level members (those without children) for the header dimensions since parents cannot have data entered to them directly. Enter and send data to the data base.

Task 4: Park N' Go Work offline with Park and Go. 1.

You are going to be off the network for a while however you still want to develop your budget values so we'll use Park N' Go to work offline and then sync the values back into the central database. Open up the 'Account Trend' input schedule, set it to offline, save it to your hard drive, enter data in pure excel offline and then log back into BPC Excel, set the offline workbook to online and send the data to BPC.

60


2010

BPC430


Solution 1: The Excel Interface Task 1: The Current View Access the interface for Excel. Then we will work with some of the options of the current view member selector which has various filtering options that allow you to easily find dimension members when performing data selections. 1.

Log on to Excel from the Admin console and become familiar with the Interface by expanding the current view, using the hypertext dimension names to select members, turn on the double click selection feature, use the filtering window to select members, and view the eTools options in the 'Planning & Consolidation' Excel ribbon tab. a)

Log onto Excel:In the Admin Console → Select 'Available Interfaces' on the lower right → 'Interface for Excel' → Connection Wizard → Server name: LOCALHOST:1080 → Next → 'Different user id and password' → Enter User: CPM-## → Password: training → Domain name: ADTWDFVM2001 → Next → Select appset BPC430_## → Next → Finish → Confirm Appset BPC430_## and Application SALES:

Figure 70: BPC430 Log in (Your appset is BPC430_##)

b)

2010

Select Ok → Now you are in the BPC Excel interface and below you can see the initial view of the action pane including the collapsed view of the current view 'CV': Continued on next page


61


BPC430

Figure 71: Excel Action Pane

In order to see the application and dimension names, expand the 'CV' (Current View) : Left click the '+' next to 'CV' to expand the current view:

Figure 72: Expanded Current View

Continued on next page

62


2010

BPC430


c)

Let's investigate the BPC ribbon: Note the initial view which shows 'Planning & Consolidation' as one the tabs → Select 'Planning & Consolidation' → Note the eMenu's which appear:

Figure 73: BPC for Excel Ribbon

d)

Select each one of the 'e' menu's under 'Planning & Consolidation'. The menu for 'eTools' is shown below:


2010


63


BPC430

Figure 74: Options for 'eTools'

2.

Now let's learn about the current view and the member selection options. a)

With your current view still expanded, open the member selector box for Category: Left click the Category Dimension: Hint: The Table 'Data view' is used to list members when the dimension has hierarchies. Also, you can left click the column label (ID and Description as shown below) to sort the members!

Figure 75: Category Member Selection Box

b)

You can always select a member with the check box, but for speed you need to use the double click feature: Left click the 'Open option dialog box' icon → Check the box as shown below → Ok → Try double clicking a member to select it.


64


2010

BPC430


Figure 76: Turning on the Double Click Feature

c)

Use the filtering window to select dimension members: Select the 'Show or hide filtering window' icon → Use the drop down to select the attribute 'Comparison' → Select '=' and 2009 → Refresh: Note: Category members can be used for any year you wish. However it is possible to use custom VBA logic to restrict their use to specific years.

Figure 77: Use the Filtering Window

d)

The result is a list of members based on their property values for informational purposes (in this case). Note: These members could also be copied into the rows or columns of a template by using the copy icon. Continued on next page

2010


65


BPC430

Task 2: Using and Creating Dynamic Report Templates Working with Dynamic Report Templates. 1.

Set your current view and then use the 'Drill in Place' dynamic report template to build a report. Open the control panel and select only 'BAS' level members in the rows. Note the EVDRE style sheet and also where you can fix dimension members. Run the 'Nested Rows' report template and then the 'Account Trend' input template. Send some data to the data base. Note: Dynamic templates are delivered EVDRE templates that users can easily modify and save. a)

Set your current view: Cancel the category dialog box → Left click on each dimension's hypertext name → Select the dimension members as shown below: Note: You can use the search to find members (the magnifying glass). Also, it may help to turn on the 'Table' data view to see a list without members grouped by parent.

Figure 78: Drill in Place - Current View (DO NOT TYPE THE VALUES IN)


66


2010

BPC430


b)

From the action pane: Select Home → Select 'Reporting and Analysis' → Build a report using a dynamic template → Select the 'Drill in Place' template → Open:

Figure 79: Drill in Place - Initial Result Set

c)

The business users need a way to see year to date data: Left click the 'Measures' dimension name → Double click 'YTD' → You should now see all 4 quarters howvever the values have now been cumulated from the 1st quarter onwards → Set Measure back to 'Periodic'.

d)

Open up the control panel and restrict the rows to base level members only: Select the '+' above column H to open up the column group → Use the drop down in F48 to select the 'BAS' memberset → Select 'Planning & Consolidation' → Select the 'Expand all' icon to execute your report change:


2010


67


BPC430

Figure 80: Drill in place - base members in rows

e)

Let's take a look at the rest of the control panel: Select the '+' sign around row 38 to open the row group → You will see the 'Override Member' column which can be used to hard code members for a specific template:

Figure 81: Member Override

f)

Scroll down to see the formatting style sheet delivered with dynamic templates:


68


2010

BPC430


Figure 82: Dynamic Template Formatting

Note: This style sheet can be used to easily change the look and feel of your results. You will work with styles later. g)

Close the row and column groups and save your template: Select the '-' for row 38 and column H to close the 'Groups' → Select eTools → Save dynamic templates → Select the Company folder (server) → Reports → Enter 'Entity Base in Rows' → Save.

Figure 83: Saving the Entity Base in Rows template


2010


69


h)

BPC430

Let's take a look at another template that is really handy: Set your current view as shown below:

Figure 84: Nested Rows - Current View

i)

Open up a template which shows account by entity: Select the 'Home' icon → Reporting and Analysis → Build a report using a dynamic template→ Scroll down → Select 'Nested Rows' → Open → ok:


70


2010

BPC430


Figure 85: Nested Row - Result

j)

The users also want to see the monthly, quarterly, and YTD data in the columns. Put measures in the columns and set your current view to 2009.DEC: Open up the control panel (via the plus sign above column J) → Use the drop down to place Measures in the columns (in H47) → Select BASMEMBERS for the memberset in H48 → Set time to 2009.DEC in the currenct view → Expand all → Not bad right?

k)

The users like this report so much they want you to make it available in the dynamic template wizard: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Wizard → Select 'template9' → Save → Replace existing file → Increase the template version (to make this new report available to other users) → Select the 'Home' icon → Reporting and Analysis → Build a report using a dynamic template→ Scroll down → Select 'Nested Rows' → Open → Ok → Voila! Note: If we needed to change the description or jpeg we would need to do that in the BW Server via the UJFS File Service. Also, you can save custom EVDRE templates this way as well.


2010


71


BPC430

Task 3: Dynamic Schedule Templates Working with Dynamic Schedule Templates 1.

Use a dynamic schedule template to build an input schedule. Set you current view to all base level members (those without children) for the header dimensions since parents cannot have data entered to them directly. Enter and send data to the data base. a)

Set your current view: Use the dimension name hypertext to set your current view as you see below:

Figure 86: Input Schedule Current View

Note: Data must be entered into BPC at the base level member ( members with no children) level. Parents cannot be planned on. b)

Open the 'Account Trend' input schedule: Select the 'Home' icon → Data input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Open → ok:


72


2010

BPC430


Figure 87: Account Trend - Before

c)

Confirm that the template type is set to 'Input Schedule': Select eTools → Workbook options → Confirm that the type is set to 'Input Schedule' → Ok:

Figure 88: Input Schedule - Workbook Type


2010


73


d)

BPC430

Send data for 2009.JAN: Enter 350 in K49, 250 in K50 and 15 in K51 → Send data (in the action pane) → Send active worksheet → Yes (to send 3 updates to the data base) → Close. Hint: The EVDRE style sheet sets new values to maroon when entered. More on that later.

e)

Send data for Feb-Dec using a formula: In L49 → Enter the formula =K49*1.05 → Copy the formula to L50 and L51 → Copy the formula across to all months → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close.

Figure 89: Account Trend - After

f)

Save your input template: Select eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Input Schedules → Enter 'Forecast Data Input' → Save.

Task 4: Park N' Go Work offline with Park and Go. 1.

You are going to be off the network for a while however you still want to develop your budget values so we'll use Park N' Go to work offline and then sync the values back into the central database. Open up the 'Account Trend' input schedule, set it to offline, save it to your hard drive, enter data in pure excel offline and then log back into BPC Excel, set the offline workbook to online and send the data to BPC.


74


2010

BPC430


a)

Set your current view: Expand your current view if necessary → Use the dimension hypertext to make the following selections:

Figure 90: Park N' Go - Current View

b)

Open the account trend input schedule: Select the 'Home' icon → Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Open → Ok.

Figure 91: Park N' Go - Before

c)

Change your security settings, then set the template to 'Offline': On the upper left → Select the 'Office Button' → Excel Options → Trust Center → Trust center settings → Macro settings → Check 'Trust access to the VBA project object model' → Select 'Ok' twice → Select 'Planning & Consolidation' → eTools → Park N Go → Offline (no connectivity) → Ok. Continued on next page

2010


75


d)

BPC430

View the 'status' of the template: Select eTools → Workbook options → Note that the template is set to offline and also the current view members are stored with the workbook:

Figure 92: Park N Go - Workbook Status

e)

Save the template: On the upper left → Select the 'Office Button' → Save as → Excel Workbook → My Computer → Database (G:) → Enter File name 'Parked Workbook ## → Save → Respond 'Yes' to the message regarding a macro free workbook.

Figure 93: Park N Go - Saving

f)

Enter your offline data: Close your BPC excel session → From your remote desktop → Start → Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Excel 2007 → Open your Parked Workbook ## from the G drive → Enter the values as show below → Save → Close Excel. Continued on next page

76


2010

BPC430


2009.JAN

g)

2009.FEB

2009.MAR

Personnel Expense 400

400

400

Wages and Salaries

350

350

350

Social Contributions

20

20

20

Go back to the BPC Interface for Excel and sync up your data: From the Admin Console → Open 'Available Interfaces' → Select the 'Interface for Excel' → Go into your BPC430_## Appset and the Sales application → Ok → Select the 'Office Button' on the upper left → Open your Parked Workbook ## from the G Drive → Planning & Consolidation →(in the action pane on the right) Park N Go → Set it to 'live data and live current view'

Figure 94: Park N Go - Set to Online

h)

Send your data: Select the back arrow in the action pane (if necessary)→ Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close. (Life is Good!)


2010


77


BPC430

Figure 95: Park N Go - Data has been sent to the database!

78


2010

BPC430


Exercise 2: Membersets & Drill Downs Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to apply memberset keywords to real life scenarios. • Use drill downs to your advantage.

Business Example Note: 'Drill Downs' are used to expand members in rows or columns for example based on hierarchical data. They are different than 'Drill Throughs' to which jump the users into other systems. A lot of time is spent by report developers to determine just the right members for the rows and columns of reports and input schedules. That's why you need to use the memberset keywords and start understanding your drill down options.

Task 1: Drill down options Use the control panel membersets and the current view to meet the requirements below. 1.

Let's work with the drill down options first in the account trend template. Put time in the rows and set the template so that it inserts (instead of over writing) members when you drill down. Call your template 'Drilldown Insert'.

Task 2: Memberset Key Words Learn how the memberset keywords are used to determine the members in your template rows and columns. 1.

Using the 'Drilldown Insert' template you just saved, work with the memberset keywords along with the control panel settings to control your rows and columns. Change the memberset options to have the following time members appear in the rows: - Show the year total at the top of the report with quarters then months. - Quarter totals above the months with the year total at the bottom. - Quarterly totals after their months and the annual total at the bottom. - Base level members for 2009.Q1 based on the current view. Continued on next page

2010


79


BPC430

- Base members of 2009.Q1 independent of the current view. - All time base members. - All members of 2009.Total independent of the current view down 1 level. - All members of 2009.Total independent of the current view down 2 levels.

Task 3: Memberset Quiz Create a report template to meet the user specifications below. 1.

80

The users you support need a report that displays entities in the rows that have the CHF currency. Only display the entity key name but not the description. If an account does not have a value, it should not appear.


2010

BPC430


Solution 2: Membersets & Drill Downs Task 1: Drill down options Use the control panel membersets and the current view to meet the requirements below. 1.

Let's work with the drill down options first in the account trend template. Put time in the rows and set the template so that it inserts (instead of over writing) members when you drill down. Call your template 'Drilldown Insert'. a)

Set your current view as shown below: Expand your current view → Make your member selections as you see below:

Figure 96: Membersets & Drilldown - CV

b)

Open the account trend template and put time in the rows with a memberset of 'DEP,SELF' and entity in the columns:: Select the 'Home' icon if necessary → Reporting & Analysis → Build a report using a dynamic template → Select the 'Subtotals by account' → Ok → Open the control panel by expanding the group above column H → Use the drop downs to place time in the rows and entity in the columns → Set your membersets as shown below → Planning & Consolidation → Expand all:


2010


81


BPC430

Figure 97: MEMBERSETS & DRILLDOWN - UNEXPANDED

c)

Drill down on 2009.Q1, what happens to Q2 for example: Double click on 2009.Q1 → Note how the system overwrites the other members:

Figure 98: Membersets & Drilldown - Expanded / Overwrite

d)

The user wants to see the year total and all quarters along with the months that have been drilled down on, so change the workbook option to 'Expand by Inserting New Rows' to provide this result: Go back to the prior state by selecting the left 'driilldown' arrow → Goto eTools → Workbook options → Check off the option 'Expand by Inserting New Rows' → Ok → Select 'Yes' to the message regarding how the system will lose track of any current drilldows (it's okay):


82


2010

BPC430


Figure 99: Membersets & Drilldown - Insert option

e)

Drill down on Q1 and Q2 to test your new setting: Double click on 2009.Q1 → You can also right click on 2009.Q2 → Drill Down:

Figure 100: Membersets & Drilldown - Expanded / Insert

f)

Try the drill 'back' feature: Select 2009.Q1 → Right click 'Drill down' → Then right click on 2009.Q2 → Right click 'Drill down' → In other words, system will drill 'back' based on what you select! Continued on next page

2010


83


g)

BPC430

Save your template on the company reports folder: Select eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Enter 'Drilldown Insert' → Save → Leave the template open.

Task 2: Memberset Key Words Learn how the memberset keywords are used to determine the members in your template rows and columns. 1.

Using the 'Drilldown Insert' template you just saved, work with the memberset keywords along with the control panel settings to control your rows and columns. Change the memberset options to have the following time members appear in the rows: - Show the year total at the top of the report with quarters then months. - Quarter totals above the months with the year total at the bottom. - Quarterly totals after their months and the annual total at the bottom. - Base level members for 2009.Q1 based on the current view. - Base members of 2009.Q1 independent of the current view. - All time base members. - All members of 2009.Total independent of the current view down 1 level. - All members of 2009.Total independent of the current view down 2 levels. a)

With time still in the rows, and the current view still set to 2009.TOTAL, how can you have the total show at the top of the report with quarters then months? In F48 → Use the drop down to select SELF,ALL → Expand all:


84


2010

BPC430


Figure 101: SELF,ALL

b)

The user needs to see the quarter totals above the months with the year total at the bottom: In F48 → Enter ALL,SELF → Expand all:

Figure 102: ALL,SELF

c)

How can you show the quarterly totals after their months and the annual total at the bottom: In F48 → Enter 'ALL,PARENTAFTER,SELF → Expand all.


2010


85


d)

BPC430

Now the user only wants to see the base level members for 2009.Q1 based on the current view: In F48 → Use the dropdown to select BAS → Set your current view to 2009.Q1 → Expand all:

Figure 103: BAS with current view = 2009.Q1

e)

Quite often report developers will need to determine membersets independent of the current view. Set time equal to 2009.TOTAL but use a memberset that only shows base members of 2009.Q1: In F48 → Enter BAS(2009.Q1) → Expand all → You should only see the three months for 2009.Q1.

f)

Here's an option that comes in handy when your report does not show any data but you know it's there: In F48 → Use the drop down to select → BASMEMBERS → Expand all to see all time members independent of the current view selection: Caution: This may result in slow template performance depending on the number of members. In real life it would be good to turn on zero suppression with this option.


86


2010

BPC430


Figure 104: BASMEMBERS

g)

Since hierarchies are so important when planning or reporting, let's use a keyword that reads the level of the hierarchy for the expansion: In F48 → Enter LALL(1,2009.TOTAL) → Expand all:

Figure 105: LALL1

Note: 'L' stands for 'Level' of the hierarchy. h)

Now let's expand down to 2 levels of the time hierarchy: In F48 → Enter LALL(2,2009.TOTAL) → Expand all:


2010


87


BPC430

Figure 106: LALL2

i)

At this point, it might be interesting to see the HLevel dimension property: Left click the time dimension in the current view → Expand to 2009.JAN for example → Right click → Member Properties → Note that the HLevel value is '3' → Check out the HLevel for 2009.TOTAL → It should be '1' → Do you see why LALL(2,2009.TOTAL) worked the way it did? (the months were displayed because they have an HLEVEL value down '2' from the TOTAL.)

Task 3: Memberset Quiz Create a report template to meet the user specifications below. 1.

The users you support need a report that displays entities in the rows that have the CHF currency. Only display the entity key name but not the description. If an account does not have a value, it should not appear. a)

Use this current view:


88


2010

BPC430


Figure 107: Memberset quiz - current view

b)

Use the nested row template to create this report:

Figure 108: Memberset quiz - result

Hint: For the entity selection, use the EVDRE Filter Builder by right clicking in the entity memberset cell in the control panel. Set CURRENCY to CHF. Hint: Use the suppress feature by entering 'Y' for entity and p_acct.

2010


89


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Work with the Interface for Excel. • Learn about the current view features. • Understand how to use delivered templates. • Save your own dynamic templates. • Work with Park N' Go. • Use the drilldown feature. • Discover how the memberset keywords can be used to control your expansions.

90


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Work with the Interface for Excel. • Learn about the current view features. • Understand how to use delivered templates. • Save your own dynamic templates. • Work with Park N' Go. • Use the drilldown feature. • Discover how the memberset keywords can be used to control your expansions.

2010


91

Unit Summary

92

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

93

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

94

BPC430


2010

Unit 3 Range Based Reporting - EvDRE Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2010

Create EVDRE templates with the EVDRE builder. Work with member selections. Use comma delimited lists. Discuss the EVDRE filter builder. Use multiple members in the page key range. Do multi sheet expansions. Create EVDRE templates via Drag & Drop Reporting. Work with the EVDRE options. Use EVDRE suppression. Experiment with the member insert option. Use the option key words. Create your own Formatting range. Do sorting and sub totalling. Use the before and after range options. Modify the row and column key ranges. Create your own plan/actual/variance reports. Use the drag and drop interface to build an EVDRE. Set up hierarchy based indentation. (advanced) Change an existing EVDRE. (advanced) Do multi EVDRE and multi application reporting. (advanced)


95

Unit 3: Range Based Reporting - EvDRE

BPC430

Unit Contents Lesson: Range Based Reporting - EVDRE ...................................... 97 Exercise 3: EVDRE Fundamentals .......................................... 165 Exercise 4: EVDRE Options .................................................. 195 Exercise 5: EVDRE Formatting............................................... 211 Exercise 6: EVDRE Sorting and Ranges.................................... 221 Exercise 7: Advanced EVDRE................................................ 251

96


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Range Based Reporting - EVDRE

Lesson: Range Based Reporting - EVDRE Lesson Overview

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Create EVDRE templates with the EVDRE builder. Work with member selections. Use comma delimited lists. Discuss the EVDRE filter builder. Use multiple members in the page key range. Do multi sheet expansions. Create EVDRE templates via Drag & Drop Reporting. Work with the EVDRE options. Use EVDRE suppression. Experiment with the member insert option. Use the option key words. Create your own Formatting range. Do sorting and sub totalling. Use the before and after range options. Modify the row and column key ranges. Create your own plan/actual/variance reports. Use the drag and drop interface to build an EVDRE. Set up hierarchy based indentation. (advanced) Change an existing EVDRE. (advanced) Do multi EVDRE and multi application reporting. (advanced)

Business Example Reporting is usually the most important feature of application like this. In this unit we will go over all of the features of the most important reporting tool: EvDRE.

Fundamentals Fundamentals

2010


97


BPC430

Figure 109: High performance BPC reports

• • •

•

You use the EvDRE (Data Range Exchange) function to generate large reports and input schedules with optimal performance. The flexible EvDRE function provides the features described on the slide. By accepting cell ranges as parameters, EvDRE workbooks are faster to download and upload because there are no send or retrieve functions in the data cells. EvDRE is bidirectional; it can both send and retrieve data. It combines and extends the functionality of other BPC functions such as EvGET and EvSND. EvDRE is faster than these functions because it does not evaluate each cell.

• •

• •

Produces smaller workbooks than EVGTS and EVSND since there is no need to embed functions to send or retrieve data. You can use EvDRE to build static workbooks (without expansions) as well as dynamic workbooks (with expansions), or workbooks where some dimensions are defined using static members while others dynamically expand. You can define one or more expansions on the rows, columns, or both simultaneously. Workbook options determine how EvDRE sends data. If the workbook option Type is set to Report, you cannot send data; if the option is set to Input Schedule, the template can retrieve and send data. Allows for easy creation of reports with multiple expansions.

•

Provides an even greater performance enhancement with nested rows/columns. Note: There are no dynamic wizard templates available for the EVDRE function.

98


2010

BPC430


Figure 110: EVDRE: Benefits

The upper slide explains why performance with EVDRE is better compared to EVGTS.

Figure 111: Building an EVDRE Report

The upper slide shows the first step you have to do to create a report or input schedule using EVDRE.

2010


99


BPC430

Figure 112: The EVDRE Builder

After you gain some experience with EVDRE, you may want to skip the 'Builder'.

Figure 113: EVDRE fundamentals - skip the builder

100


2010

BPC430


Figure 114: The EVDRE Builder: Grid Layout

This slide goes into more detail concerning the EVDRE Builder.

Figure 115: The EVDRE Builder: Grid Design

2010


101


BPC430

Figure 116: The EVDRE Builder: After selecting OK

The upper slide shows the results of customizing with the EVDRE Builder.

Figure 117: Expand All

102


2010

BPC430


EVDRE templates have workbook options too. Here you can select the report or input schedule type workbook. You can also set the refresh behavior. For example, you can choose not to refresh on every current view change, that way, you can make all of the current view changes and only refresh when you are ready. The 'EVRE: Refresh by sheet' can be used to open up your reports faster.

Figure 118: EVDRE: Workbook Type and Refresh Options

In order for the workbook to be used to send data to the SAP Business Planning and Consolidation server, the workbook options Type must be set to Input Schedule.

2010


103


BPC430

Figure 119: EVDRE: Main Ranges

You can choose to hide the row and column keys. Just enter 'Y' in the options range for the hide row and column key options.

Figure 120: Hide Keys (your values may vary or you may not have any)

This slide gives you an overview about the different areas within the EVDRE report.

104


2010

BPC430


Figure 121: Status Message

It's always good to check if the status of EVDRE is still ok. If not the system gives you an error message with a hint what went wrong.

Figure 122: Page Key Range

The Page Key Range refers to the header section of the Template which contains the Current View. Therefore this Current View column contains EVCVW functions as described in the upper slide. The PageKey range is optional and you can limit it to only specific dimensions in the application. You can define multiple key ranges, separated by commas.

2010


105


BPC430

If any dimensions are not specified in the PageKey range, the system takes them from the current view or the workbook-specific current view. To override the current view, replace EVCVW functions with hard-coded member names.

Figure 123: Formatted Page Key Range

Figure 124: The EVRNG Function

106


2010

BPC430


The upper slide explains the EVRNG function which is used in diverse cells within EVDRE and thus plays an important role if you want to refer to ranges.

Figure 125: EVCVW

The EVMBR function in the header section of your report allows you to double-click at the dimension members and select a different member as current view.

2010


107


BPC430

Figure 126: EVMBR for Entity

Figure 127: EVMBR

Here is an example for the Entity dimension. Note that you only need to put in a valid member, the system will determine the dimension.

108


2010

BPC430


Of course you can use push buttons to call macros as well as the BPC MNU commands. (more to come on this later) There is also an MNU command 'EVMNU' which can be used to call other MNU's to refresh the workbook and also to send data via a hypertext look and feel.

Figure 128: Refresh EVMNU

Below you can see what the EVMNU command looks like in a workbook. The 'send data' link uses the mnu: MNU_ESUBMIT_REFSCHEDULE_SHEET_REFRESH. This MNU is really great for testing quick data sends.

2010


109


BPC430

Figure 129: Command Links

110


2010

BPC430


Figure 130: EVDRE: Range Table - Optional Fields

•

CellKey range: This functionality allows you to override the current view, or part of it, for any cell in the data range, as defined by the page keys, the column keys, and the row keys.

•

•

You can use the CellKey range only on static reports (reports that do not include EvDRE-driven expansions). The CellKeyRange must be equal to or smaller than the data range for which it redefines the current view for a cell.. Example: The first column retrieves the values of each month of 2007. The second column retrieves the values of each month of 2008. You achieve this result by using a CellKey range made up of only one Row, combined with a Row Expansion. Since the report contains a Row expansion, the expansion automatically creates an expanded copy of the CellKey range to the right of the report Data Range. This copy is the actual CellKey range that the function uses to define the key of the cells of the data range.

•

•

GetOnly Range: You want a group of values in an input schedule to only retrieve (not send) values. The cells are designated as read-only. You can send cells with zero values in the following ways:

•

– Enter zero (0) and then send the cells – Erase the values in the cells and then send the cells. Format: Can be a single cell to format the data range or a range using advanced formatting options. Formatting is applied during expansion. If you are not performing an expansion, the FormatRange is irrelevant.

Here are the guidelines for the expansion range:

2010


111


BPC430

Figure 131: EVDRE fundamentals - expansion range

Figure 132: EVDRE fundamentals - valid memberset keywords

112


2010

BPC430


Figure 133: EVDRE fundamentals - 'level' related memberset keywords

You can use comma delimited members and keywords in the membersets. If you used member1,,member2 in the rows for example, a clear row would be generated between the two members. You can use that technique to create spacing in your reports.

Figure 134: Accounts: BAS(CE0004000),CE0004000

The EVDRE filter builder is a really great way to automatically generate MDX filters. Just right click in the memberset and select 'EVDRE: Builder Filter'.

2010


113


BPC430

Figure 135: The P_Acct Builder Filter

Here is the resulting MDX!

Figure 136: Memberset MDX

You can also use multiple member id's in the page key range. In the example below, and the data values belong to both Store1 and Store2. You can use parent or base level members like this.

114


2010

BPC430


Figure 137: Multi member: Store1 & 2

In order to do a multi sheet expansion, just include the dimension you want expanded in the sheets in the 'spread across worksheets' field.

Figure 138: Multi Sheet: Builder

The system will name each sheet for the member expanded into it thereby creating a 'book' of reports. Each sheet is essentially a replica of the starting EvDRE function. The starting sheet and the other 'expanded' sheets will have the expansion dimension id hard coded into the page key which means the current view no longer can be used for the sheet dimension. So, as an alternative, you could use a memberset in the first sheet such as 'BAS(CONREGION)'.

2010


115


BPC430

The system will automatically create a 3rd expansion for the sheets. In the case below we are viewing the 1st sheet.

Figure 139: Multi Sheet: Expansion 3

Here are the results:

Figure 140: Multi Sheet: Initial results

• • • •

116

There must be only one EVDRE function in the sheet defining the expansion. Only one dimension can be expanded across sheets. The before and after ranges for the sheet expansion are ignored. The insert parameter for the sheet expansion is also ignored.


2010

BPC430


You can also create EVDRE reports using the drag and drop option. Drag and drop reporting provides an alternative method for creating reports. You use the action pane to design the report structures and contents. The resulting report is based on EvDRE, so after you create the report you can modify it using the drag and drop reporting interface or the EvDRE control panel. We recommend that you use EvDRE Builder to use more advanced features, such as the following: Options and Format ranges Advanced sorting options; Expand by sheet function; Multiple EvDRE tables per sheet. By default, drag and drop reporting does not support these features. From the Excel Interface, just select Reporting and Analysis to see the drag and drop option.

Figure 141: EVDRE Drop & Drop Link

You can build EVDRE templates without going into the control panel by using hypertext links.

2010


117


BPC430

Figure 142: EVDRE Drag & Drop Links

Here's what the sub screens look like to modify membersets:

Figure 143: EVDRE Modifying the Column Memberset for Time

Here's a sample report. Perhaps drag and drop would be an option for 'lighter' users.

118


2010

BPC430


Figure 144: EVDRE Sample Result

EVDRE Options When you create your EVDRE reports with the 'enable options range' selected, the system will use the EVRNG function to reference the generated option range further down.

Figure 145: EVDRE - Options: Control Panel

2010


119


BPC430

Figure 146: Option Table

If you don't want to use the option range, you can always enter just the keywords you need into the option field.

Figure 147: Use the option key words

AutofitCol Automatically adjusts the size of the columns containing the EvDRE ranges to fit the content after refreshing data. Bottom n Shows only the specified number (n) of the lowest values in the entire data range.

120


2010

BPC430


DumpDataCache The content of the data cache is written in the log file EvDre_log.txt. ExpandOnly Disables the refresh action and performs only an expansion, when requested. The system does not retrieve data from the database. GroupExpansion If you use dynamic hierarchies, you can expand on Entity and Group at the same time. Any fixed group dimension structure used in statutory dynamic hierarchies remains intact in EvDRE reporting. HideColKeys and HideRowKeys Hides the corresponding key ranges. NoRefresh Pevents the system from refreshing data from the database NoSend Prevents the system from sending data to the database. PctInput Enforces a different percentage of input data to trigger SQL queries (default is 20%) QueryEngine Manual (or blank for Automatic) QueryType NEXJ,TUPLE (or blank for Automatic) QueryViewName Use a user-defined view for querying SQL data. ShowComments Add an Excel comment in any DataRange cell with a formula, if the value retrieved from the database differs from the one displayed by the formula. ShowNullAsZero All empty cells in the data range are filled with zeros. SortCol Sorts a given column.

2010


121


BPC430

SQLOnly Forces the query engine to only issue SQL queries. SumParent Inserts new rows with subtotals. SuppressDataRow and SuppressDataCol Performs a suppression on the defined data range directly in Excel. SuppressNodata Prevent the suppression of zero values. Only missing (no data) values are suppressed. Otherwise, both zeros and missing data are suppressed. Top n Shows only the specified number (n) of highest values in the entire data range. Here's an example that is using '5' for the bottom parameter.

Figure 148: Bottom 5

When you do not want to see blanks ( or zero's if you turn on 'show null as zero) in your reports, you can use the suppression feature. The example below does not have suppression turned on (as 'nulls' are set to display as zero):

122


2010

BPC430


Figure 149: No suppression and show null as zero

Here's an example of the same report with row suppression turned on:

Figure 150: Suppress Rows

EVDRE suppression will also hide columns if the entire column has no values.

Figure 151: Suppressed zeroes in columns

2010


123


BPC430

EVDRE suppression has a unique feature in that it can be used to select members with activity for a category for example that is different than the current view. In the example below, notice the page key range is set to NBUDGET but the suppression option is set to ACTUAL!

Figure 152: Accounts with actual values in 2009

Suppress Parameter: EvDRE's Suppress parameter allows you to suppress rows and columns so that no values appear in all fields during an expansion. The system does not suppress rows or columns returning a zero (where a zero amount is stored in the database). By default, the suppression is driven by the values returned in the data range of the EvDRE function. You can base the suppression on a different region of data than the one being retrieved. For example, you may specify that, even if you are retrieving category ACTUAL, you want the suppression to be based on what exists in category BUDGET. You can specify multiple members of the same dimension or different dimensions in the overriding expression. For example, in the Suppress field, you can enter:[actual,budget],2008.total. An alternative suppression method is the block suppression. This feature allows you to activate the suppression but also retain the entire set of members of the innermost expansion, even if only one row (or column) has values.

124


2010

BPC430


You can activate block suppression while defining an alternative region to drive the suppression.

Figure 153: Asymmetric Suppression 1/2

To activate the suppression, enter Y in the Suppress field of an expansion. To base the suppression on a different region of data, enter the ID of the overriding dimension members in the Suppress field. To activate the block suppression, enter the keyword B in the Suppress field. This keyword works only in combination with a formatted range of members assigned to the innermost expansion. For example, you can enter SUPPRESS=B:[actual,budget],2008.total. Retain Members in Suppressions: EvDRE allows you to retain a member in a suppressed dimension. When you select multiple dimensions in the row/column keys, you can display at least one row/column for each member of the outer dimensions, but only the members with values for the inner dimension. You can use the RETAIN keyword in the SUPPRESS field to retain a member in a suppressed dimension. You can also use the RETAIN keyword without a parameter. The system takes the member to retain in the suppressed dimension from the current view, as set in the PageKey range.

2010


125


BPC430

Figure 154: Asymmetric Suppression 2/2

Planners sometimes like to insert new members on the fly. The EVDRE insert feature provides the planners this flexibility. Just set the memberset to NOEXPAND and 'Y' to allow inserts.

Figure 155: Inserting members

EVDRE Formatting EVDRE Formatting Options EVDRE features three options to do formatting.

126


2010

BPC430


Figure 156: Format Range

Formatting Cell We've already seen how you can quickly format the data range just by changing the style of the upper left cell. If you have multiple EVDRE's in your workbook, you can also use a formatting cell that will provide the 'styles' for all EVDRE's.

Figure 157: Format Cell Results

2010


127


BPC430

When you create your EVDRE template, choose the formatting option as shown below and you can use the default style sheet, import from a local file, or use the styles from a file on the BPC server.

Figure 158: EVDRE Formatting Grid Option

Allow Formatting: You define format ranges that can point either to one cell or to an entire range of cells. For one cell, EVDRE applies the format of the defined cell to the entire data range. For a range of cells, EVDRE interprets the content of the cells in the defined range to derive the formatting instructions, then applies them to different areas in the report range. When you leave the FormatRange cell blank, EvDRE automatically derives the format of the data range from the format of the top left cell of the data range to be expanded. You can define one or multiple format values. The system executes the EvDRE function in sequence from the first (top row) to the last (bottom row) in the range. You can define which format should prevail over conflicting formats (for example, the Locked format overwrites the Calc format, which in turn overwrites the Default format). You can overlay different formatting properties on the same cell. You can also define a different format for different ranges of the sheet. FormatRange supports empty members in both Row and Column MemberSet definitions to allow for more versatile formatting.

128


2010

BPC430


Below you can see the default formatting grid.

Figure 159: The default EVDRE formatting grid

Check out how intricate you can make your reports!

2010


129


BPC430

Figure 160: EVDRE formatting general example

Here's a more specific example of how it works:

Figure 161: EVDRE formatting specific example

If you select “Allow Formatting” and then “Use Default Formatting” a Formatting Table is generated in the Control Panel which you can see in the upper slide.

130


2010

BPC430


The following columns represent the 6 separate parameters that define formatting instructions: • • • • • •

CRITERIA EVALUATE IN FORMAT USE PARAMETERS APPLY TO

All 6 columns are required and must be found in the correct order. Note: The values entered into the format column are being used to 'preview' the styles.

Figure 162: CRITERIA Column

2010


131


BPC430

Figure 163: EVDRE formatting - criteria column

•

CRITERIA: Defines what triggers the formatting instruction. For example, the criteria could be based on the calculated or noncalculated status of a cell. Note: The system does not support a comma delimited list of values in the Criteria column (except when you use the {dim.property}= {value} keyword.

•

Default applied regardless of criteria Calc: applied only to calculated members Input: applied only to noncalculated members {dim.property}= {value}: applied only to the members of dimensions {dim} with property {property} = {value}

•

132

You can also use the <> keyword.


2010

BPC430


Figure 164: EVALUATE IN Column

•

EVALUATE IN Allows you to restrict the range for which the criteria must be evaluated.

•

Row - Evaluate the criteria in ROW Column: Evaluate the criteria in COLUMN All or blank: Evaluate the criteria in PAGE or COLUMN or ROW or CELL Page: Evaluate the criteria in PAGE RowCol

2010


133


BPC430

Figure 165: FORMAT Column

•

FORMAT COLUMN Represents the desired formatting properties The definition of the format is directly driven by the Excel format of the FORMAT cell, as defined using the native Excel formatting tools. Note

•

The format properties of a cell include the Lock property. This property is not visible unless you open the Excel Format Cell dialog box. EvDREs formatting engine uses it to prevent or allow a user to modify the content of the cells or a workbook.

•

134

Color, font size, font attributes


2010

BPC430

2010



135


BPC430

Figure 166: USE Column

•

USE COLUMN Specifies which components of the defined format should be applied.

•

EvDRE uses only the Pattern and the Fontsize properties of the FORMAT cell and ignores all other formatting properties (for example, font name, or border). By separating formatting options into independent groups the system allows you to overlay different settings that are not mutually exclusive, and combine them into the final result. Note: The system supports all cell properties that use VBA syntax. The system does not support a comma delimited list of values in the USE column.

• • • • • • • • • •

• •

136

All: Apply all formatting properties Pattern: Apply all the pattern formatting properties Number: Apply the number formatting properties Alignment: Apply the alignment (Center, Left, Right, Justified) Font: Apply all the font formatting properties FontStyle: Apply the font style only (regular, bold, italic) Border: Apply a border to each individual CELL in the range Frame: Apply an external border to the RANGE as a whole Style: Apply all style properties (as defined in Excel) Content: Apply what is in the cell itself. You can change the content; instead of showing the value you can override it with the text noted in the format range. If the value exceeds 1 million, you can change the content to say exceeds. Lock: Apply the LOCK property Protection: Applies the entire Cell Protection section (Locked+FormulaHidden)


2010

BPC430


Figure 167: PARAMETERS Column

•

PARAMETERS COLUMN used to enter some formatting instruction directly in textual format.

•

For example, entering FONTSIZE=“12” defines in a textual format the font size to use. Note: The system supports all cell properties that use VBA syntax.

2010


137


BPC430

Figure 168: APPLY TO Column

•

APPLY TO Defines the sections of the report to which the format should be applied.

•

EvDRE applies the defined format to only the headings area of the row/column containing a calculated member. If you leave this field is blank, the current formatting instruction is applied to only the data range. Note: The system does not support a comma delimited list of values in the APPLY TO column.

• • • •

Blank: Apply to the Key Range, Headings Range, PageKey Range, and Data Range Heading: Applies to the Header Section Data: Apply to the Data range Key: Apply to the row or column Key Range

Here's an example of the output from the above 'style' sheet.

138


2010

BPC430


Figure 169: Formatting grid results

Figure 170: General Formatting Tips

2010


139


BPC430

Figure 171: EVDRE Style Sheets

Style Imports: When you create a report using the EvDRE Builder, you can import formatting definitions from a previously created EvDRE report (referred to as style workbook). Note: If you modify the style workbook, the system does not update the new style definitions on reports built using the older version of the style. The style workbook may contain formatting instructions defining what cells, for example, should be locked, but it cannot be protected. To set up workbook protection, you must set it up in each of the new reports or schedules built that use such a style. You can import an EvDRE style workbook only when you build a new report using the EvDRE Builder. When you choose to import styles from an existing EvDRE report, the following items are imported: • • • • •

The Format range of the EvDRE function All workbook options Any Excel-defined styles The workbook color palette The range of cells to the right of the page key range and above the column headings (which might contain a title for the report).

To import a style workbook select the “Allow formatting” option, choose the desired Import Style radio button (either from local or from server) and the appropriate style workbook, then choose OK.

140


2010

BPC430


EVDRE Sorting and Ranges When you create your EVDRE, you can just turn on the sorting and sub totalling feature.

Figure 172: Sorting with a break total in the EVDRE Builder

Figure 173: Results

Check out how the system performed the sorting and totalling:

2010


141


BPC430

Figure 174: Advanced Sorting - Control Panel

You can also do more advanced sorting as you can see below by using the sort range that the system generates (if you enable the sorting parameter). In conjunction with the after range, you can then create sub totals with 'evsub' and label them as 'Total %key%' The %key% performs a lookup for the member id's. In this next challenge, we need to create an account by entity report that sorts and totals by currency.

142


2010

BPC430


Figure 175: Sorting Control Panel - Sort entities by currency

Figure 176: Sorting II: Entity by Currency Results

2010


143


BPC430

Use before and after ranges to separate report results into 'sections', use range based formatting, and sub totaling. The business users you support have requested several reports lately which call for reports which break data into sections so that it is easier to read and to generate sub totals.

Figure 177: Before range expansion

When you use before and after ranges the system will be inserting rows and / or columns so you will receive a message when you use expand all.

Figure 178: Ranges - EVDRE message

144


2010

BPC430


Figure 179: Ranges - Before range result

Figure 180: Ranges - After range expansion

Here's in result of the after range:

2010


145


BPC430

Figure 181: EVDRE after range result

You can also use the column after range to generate a total in case there isn't a dimension hierarchy group that you can use.

Figure 182: Ranges - column total expansion

146


2010

BPC430


Figure 183: Ranges - Column total result

Since EVDRE is an array based tool, it will generate a continuous set of row and column data. However, that may make it difficult to do your analysis. You can use multiple row and column key ranges to break the results up into 'blocks' for easier analysis. As an example, what if you wanted a report that shows account by entity such as the one below?

Figure 184: Row key range: Result

2010


147


BPC430

Figure 185: EVDRE: Range Table - The Row and Column key ranges

•

RowKey Range: The range of cells that is reserved for the member IDs used to return data to the rows.

•

•

•

If your report or input schedule uses expansions, the system takes the member IDs for the range from the values defined in the Expand range parameter's Dimension and MemberSet rows. If the report is static, the system takes the member IDs from the current view of the report or input schedule, or from other values specified in the Pagekey and CellKey ranges. ColKey Range: If your report or input schedule uses expansions, the system takes the member IDs for the range from the values defined in the Expand range parameter's Dimension and MemberSet rows.

•

•

•

148

On a static report, the system takes the member IDs from the current view of the report or input schedule, or from other values specified in the PageKey and CellKey ranges. You can insert text, blank spaces, or formulas (like break totals) into rows or columns within the data range, without breaking the column or row key ranges in multiple ranges. If you leave at least one blank cell in the column or row keys, the corresponding column or row is not affected by the function.


2010

BPC430


In the example below, you can see the row key range that the system generated.

Figure 186: Row key range initial example.

Here's how you can add another row key range.

2010


149


BPC430

Figure 187: Row key range - 2 row key ranges

When you use multiple row or column keys, you need to use the 'pipe' symbol as a separator. So if you want Store1 1st and then Store101 2nd, you would input the memberset: 'Store1|Store101. This will make the rows relatively static (entity in the case below is hard coded.)

Figure 188: Row key expansion

There is no limit to the number of members that use can use as the 'by' words.

150


2010

BPC430


Figure 189: Row key range: 3 Entites

Now, for our next challenge, the users need to see multiple sections of the same accounts however for different time frames. Here's the column key ranges we are going to use.

Figure 190: Row col key range: Expansion

Here are the results:

2010


151


BPC430

Figure 191: Column key range: Result

Next you need to create a 'plan vs. actual' comparison report for the monthly value vs. year to date. To do this we'll turn off expansion and manually enter some of the column keys. This is the result set that we want:

Figure 192: Static columns: Budget vs. Actual

Once we manually adjust the columns, we need to turn off expansion.

152


2010

BPC430


Figure 193: Static columns: Delete expansion formula

Advanced EVDRE Use hierarchy metadata to drive indentation of your row expansions. In the example below, the user has requested that the entity members be indented based on their position in the hierarchy. For example, one space for level 1, two spaces for level 2 etc.

Figure 194: Advanced DRE Indent: ALL in rows, no indentation

We'll use the EVPRO function to look up the member levels.

2010


153


BPC430

Figure 195: Advanced DRE Indent: EVPRO Function

Figure 196: Advanced DRE Indent: EVPRO Result

154


2010

BPC430


Figure 197: Advanced DRE Indent: EVDES Function

This looks pretty good but do you see what problem would likely occur? What if more entity dimension members are added ... past row 39? (that's where the evpro is in this example) In other words our solution is not completely dynamic.

Figure 198: Advanced DRE Indent: Indented result

To make this a fully dynamic solution we need to add the following to the formula:

2010


155


BPC430

Figure 199: Advanced DRE Indent: REPT with EVPRO and EVDES

Cross application reporting You need a report which displays data for both the sales and planning application in one workbook. The first EVDRE will pull data from the SALES application which is the application in the current view.

Figure 200: Sales Application

The second EVDRE will pull data from the Planning application while the current view is set to 'Sales'. Notice that the dimensions are different in this application. Note: The Planning application in this example does contain any data.

156


2010

BPC430


Figure 201: Planning

Now you can save your workbook and when you reopen it, you will see data selections from two applications. Multiple EVDRE's You can use multiple EVDRE functions to optimize performance. The concept in this case is to use two EVDREfunctions, the first will be used to retrieve data and the second will be used to send data. Note: In the example below, the EVDRE filter builder was used generate the MDX statements.

2010


157


BPC430

Figure 202: Multi EVDRE's: 1st Expansion Range & Result

For the 2nd EVDRE, use EVMBR for time because we want to use a different member than the current view.

Figure 203: Multi EVDRE: EVMBR

158


2010

BPC430


Figure 204: Multi DRE: Formatted Result

Now, you can see that we are sending data via on EVDRE and retrieving via another. In some cases this could improve performance since we are breaking up the data processing into smaller components.

Figure 205: Multi DRE: Data Sent

Modify an existing EVDRE Let's start with this report. What if you want to add a dimension to the rows without starting over?

2010


159


BPC430

Figure 206: Modify existing DRE - Initial

• • • • • •

Move the row key range, column key range and data range over to make room for two more columns. (on for the entity key and one for the description) Copy column C (expansion2) → Paste it into D → Change it to Expansion3 Select Entity for the dimension in expansion3. Change the row key range to include column G (Entity) In the EVDRE formula → Add the additional dimension to the expand range. Add descriptions for entity:: Copy H13 to I13.

Figure 207: Modify existing DRE - Row key range

160


2010

BPC430


Figure 208: Modify existing DRE - EVDRE expand range

Figure 209: Modify existing DRE - Range result

Figure 210: EVDRE advanced - sequence of events

2010


161


BPC430

Figure 211: EVDRE advanced - current view precedence

Figure 212: EVDRE advanced - cell key ranges

Figure 213: EVDRE advanced - use of members

162


2010

BPC430


Figure 214: EVDRE advanced - evsum vs. evsub

Figure 215: EVDRE advanced - sumparent option

2010


163


BPC430

Figure 216: EVDRE advanced suppression

164


2010

BPC430


Exercise 3: EVDRE Fundamentals Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with the EVDRE function to build a report template. • Override members in the header area and change the formatting to indicate that the members are not dynamically determined by the current view. • Work with the memberset key words to control what members appear in the rows and columns. • Format the data cells. • Create an input schedule and add hypertext commands. • Use EVMBR to allow report specific selection of members via double clicking. • Use comma delimited membersets. • Experiment with the EVDRE filter builder to generate MDX syntax automatically.

Business Example Note: EVDRE = Everest Dynamic Range Exchange. (Everest was the original product name) Even though this product has delivered templates, every customer will need to create their own for more meaningful analysis. The EVDRE function has quite a few options and so it will take some time to master it. In this lab, we'll start with the fundamentals. Note: All of the labs are performed in your BPC430_## Appset and the SALES Application.

Task 1: EVDRE Basics Create a basic EVDRE report template, open up the control panel to see how to modify the settings. Work with the page key range to control data selections. Try out the memberset key words for a variety of data selection scenarios. 1.

Set your current view as you see below and then use the =evdre() formula to create a report template. Open up the column group to see the control panel and check out the page key range to select members for dimensions in both the header and body of the report. Continued on next page

2010


165


BPC430

Task 2: Member Selections Use the report template created in the previous lab to create an input schedule template. Override specific members in the header area. The Workbook Type field of the Current Workbook Options dialog box determines whether an EVDRE workbook will behave like a report or input schedule. You can use the EvMBR function in PageKey ranges to define specific members. The EvMBR function returns the ID of a member (selected from the Member Lookup dialog box) to the cell without changing the current view. 1.

Use the report template created in the previous lab to create an input schedule.

2.

Use the EVMBR function to allow the use of dimension members that are different than the current view (for flexibility). The user also needs to use a hypertext link to refresh data, so we will need to use the EVMNU function along with the BPC command: MNU_ETOOLS_REFRESH for that.

Task 3: Comma delimited lists and the Filter Builder Create a basic EVDRE report template. 1.

Open up a blank workbook and launch the EVDRE builder. Put Category in the columns and set the memberset to show ACTUAL, BUDGET, and FORECAST with a comma delimited list.

Task 4: Multiple members in page key range Occasionally you may need to see values for multiple members in the result set without have them in the rows or columns. If a hierarchy group already exists for the members you want to 'sum', you can merely use that group in your current view. However, you may not want to create a hierarchy group for an hoc report and so you'll be interested in using comma delimited members in the page key range. 1.

Run a new evdre report and try using multiple STORE# separated by commas to see how evdre aggregation functions.


166


2010

BPC430


Task 5: Multi Sheet Expansions You need to analyze expense over time for your entities. Use the EVDRE sheet expansion to display entities in the sheets for example. 1.

Go into the EVDRE builder and set entity to spread across worksheets, run the function and expand all to see your results. Try the LDEP(1,CONSMALL) entity memberset to populate the sheets with base level members. Then, see how flexible the sheet expansion is by placing time in the sheet expansion.

Task 6: EVDRE Memberselection Quiz & Drag and Drop You need a report which displays labor accounts by STORE10 and then STORE1 in the rows with the quarters and then annual total for 2009 in the columns. 1. 2.

2010

Create a new EVDRE report to produce the result shown below. EVDRE Drag & Drop (Optional)


167


BPC430

Solution 3: EVDRE Fundamentals Task 1: EVDRE Basics Create a basic EVDRE report template, open up the control panel to see how to modify the settings. Work with the page key range to control data selections. Try out the memberset key words for a variety of data selection scenarios. 1.

Set your current view as you see below and then use the =evdre() formula to create a report template. Open up the column group to see the control panel and check out the page key range to select members for dimensions in both the header and body of the report. a)

In the 'Interface for Excel' set your current view: Expand your current view and select the members shown below:

Figure 217: EVDRE - Fundamentals CV

b)

Open up a blank workbook: Goto the 'Office button' on the upper left → Select 'new' to create a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter '=evdre()' → Enter → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh Workbook:


168


2010

BPC430


Figure 218: EVDRE - Fundamentals: Builder

c)

Run the function and go into the control panel: Select OK → Access the control panel by opening the column 'group' via the plus sign in column D: Note: You can drill down on parents in custom EVDRE reports as well as the delivered dynamic templates. For example, you can double click on 2009.Q1 to see the months. In the Action Pane, you can select the drill 'back' arrow or right click in a cell and Go Back.


2010


169


BPC430

Figure 219: EVDRE - Fundamentals: Control Panel

d)

Take a look at the EVCVW formula and the page key range, then change the entity selection to CONREGION and view the results: Goto B4 → Select F2 → You can see the referenced cells for the page key range in H3:H9. → Then left click in H4 to see the EVCVW formula (you can double click on this formula to set the current view members) → Double click on H4 → Select CONREGION → Expand all:


170


2010

BPC430


Figure 220: Conregion

e)

Make the following selections in the page key range: Double click cell H9 → Select 2009.Q1 → Ok → Expand all to have the system query the database for 2009.Q1 and its dependents → Type CE0004000 into cell H7 to replace the EVCVW function with a hard coded member → Select cell H3 and enter BUDGET→ Enter PERIODIC IN H5 → Enter 'LC' in H8 → Format the H3, H5, and H7:H8 cells with a light gray fill by right clicking on the cell → Format cells → Also format H4,H6,and H9 with a white pattern and thick box border:


2010


171


BPC430

Figure 221: Formatted Page Key Range

f)

Format the data cells: Select cell G13 → Format the cell to show numbers → No decimals → Commas for thousands → An outline border → No color fill → Expand all to render your formatting changes:

Figure 222: Formatted Data Range (your values may vary or you may not have any)

g)

Hide the row and column keys: Enter 'Y' in cells B29 and B30 to suppress the display of the technical ids → Expand all → Your result set should appear as follows:


172


2010

BPC430


Figure 223: Hide Keys (your values may vary or you may not have any)

h)

Save your template on the server so others can access it: Select etools → Save Dynamic Templates → Company(server) → Reports → Enter 'BASIC EVDRE' → Save → Do not close the template. Note: Team leaders can save to the team folder, in the training system everyone is assigned to the ADMIN team.

Task 2: Member Selections Use the report template created in the previous lab to create an input schedule template. Override specific members in the header area. The Workbook Type field of the Current Workbook Options dialog box determines whether an EVDRE workbook will behave like a report or input schedule. You can use the EvMBR function in PageKey ranges to define specific members. The EvMBR function returns the ID of a member (selected from the Member Lookup dialog box) to the cell without changing the current view. 1.

Use the report template created in the previous lab to create an input schedule. a)

Turn off the suppression of the row and column keys and set the template to allow input: Remove the 'Y' in B29 and B30 → Expand all → Goto to eTools → Workbook options → In the 'Type' field → Select 'Input Schedule' → Select 'EVDRE: Refresh by Sheet' → Ok:


2010


173


BPC430

Figure 224: Workbook Type

b)

After you 'Expand', change your EVDRE settings as follows: Expand all → If the expand options box appears, select 'clear input' → Ok → Put category in the columns in B16 → Type ACTUAL in B17 → Type BAS,SELF in C17 → Set entity to CONEUROPE and time to 2009.TOTAL in the current view → Expand all → Clear (if necessary) → Ok: Note: BAS will select all base level members (members with no children) for a parent. SELF will select the member itself.

Figure 225: Actual Category in Column

2.

174

Use the EVMBR function to allow the use of dimension members that are different than the current view (for flexibility). Continued on next page


2010

BPC430


The user also needs to use a hypertext link to refresh data, so we will need to use the EVMNU function along with the BPC command: MNU_ETOOLS_REFRESH for that. a)

Use the EVMBR function for Entity: Unhide column H → Delete the contents of cell H4 → With your cursor still in H4 → Select the Excel 'insert function' button → Select category 'Planning and Consolidation' → EvMBR → Configure as follows: Note: The EVMBR function identifies the dimension based on the member name. Also, the filter list is used to return a list of members for the filter speciffied such as CURRENCY=USD for example. Hint: Use the F4 key to lock down the row and column. Also, the system will insert double quotes for you.

Figure 226: EVMBR for Entity (Application Name is in H2)

b)

Refresh the workbook to see the results for Store1 then use EVMBR for the time dimension: Select 'refresh workbook' to see the Store1 results → Respond 'Yes' to clear existing data → What Entity value does the current view have? → It should be something other than STORE1!

c)

The business requirements call for the same solution for time: Insert another EVMBR function for Time determination in H9 and configure as follows:


2010


175


BPC430

Figure 227: Time EVMBR

d)

Refresh the workbook to check your results: Select 'Refresh Workbook' → You will be prompted to clear any existing data → Respond 'Yes':

Figure 228: EVMBR Results

e)

Add the hypertext for refreshing the data: In cell E5 → Insert function → EVMNU → Configure as follows: Note: MNU commands can be used to perform essentially every function in the Excel Interface. You can access documentation via :


176


2010

BPC430


Figure 229: Refresh EVMNU

f)

Add a 'link' for sending data: In E6 → Insert function → EVMNU → Enter the macro name 'MNU_ESUBMIT_REFSCHEDULE_SHEET_REFRESH' → Enter Display name: 'SEND DATA' → Ok → Format both links bold, underlined, 14 font size, and blue → Select refresh → Clear existing input data:

Figure 230: Command Links


2010


177


g)

BPC430

Test the links in the schedule by entering data: Double click H4 → Select Store 6 → Refresh → Clear existing input data:

Figure 231: Schedule after refresh

h)

Enter and send some data: Enter 24,600 for personnel expense → SEND DATA → Note the processing message on the lower left in your status bar → You have updated the data base.

i)

Go back to the original amount: Enter 0 → SEND DATA.

j)

eTools → Save dynamic template → Company folder → Reports→ 'EVDRE with Hypertext' → Save.

Task 3: Comma delimited lists and the Filter Builder Create a basic EVDRE report template. 1.

Open up a blank workbook and launch the EVDRE builder. Put Category in the columns and set the memberset to show ACTUAL, BUDGET, and FORECAST with a comma delimited list. a)

178

Goto the 'windows button' on the upper left → Select 'new' to create a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter '=evdre()' → Enter → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh Workbook → Select Ok to accept the defaults → Open the 'group' in column D → Select the Category dimension via the drop down in B16 → Enter ACTUAL, BUDGET,FORECAST in B17 → Expand all → You should see ACTUAL, BUDGET, and FORECAST in the columns of your report: Continued on next page


2010

BPC430


Figure 232: Comma delimited categories

b)

Put Time in the columns and use the SELF key word to select the current view member. In the rows, the user wants to see the basemembers of CE0004000 and the CE0004000 total at the bottom: Use the drop down in B16 to select TIME → In B17 → Select 'SELF' → In C17 → Enter: BAS(CE0004000),CE0004000 → Set your current view to 2009.TOTAL (if necessary)→ Expand all:

Figure 233: Accounts: BAS(CE0004000),CE0004000


2010


179


BPC430

c)

Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports → Enter 'Memberset Key Words' → Save → Don't close the template.

d)

Put Entity into the columns and use EVDRE filter builder to select the dependents of the H1 hierarchy: Right click in B17 → EVDRE: builder filter → Configure as shown below → Use the 'test' button to preview your results:

Figure 234: Entity builder filter

e)

Use the builder filter for P_ACCT to select EXP accounts that are not calculated by the system: Select 'Apply' → Note the MDX statement generated in B17 → Now let's use the filter builder for the account dimension: Right click in C17 → EVDRE: builder filter → Configure as shown below → 'Test' the selection criteria:


180


2010

BPC430


Figure 235: P_Acct Builder Filter

f)

Apply the P_Acct filter: Select 'Apply' → You should have the following expansion criteria:

Figure 236: Memberset MDX

g)

Format your data cells and render the report: Format G13 as numeric, no decimals, commas for thousands, No fill, and border pattern → Expand all:


2010


181


BPC430

Figure 237: Builder filter result

h)

Save your template again: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports → Select 'Memberset Key Words' → Save → Select 'Yes' to overwrite.

Task 4: Multiple members in page key range Occasionally you may need to see values for multiple members in the result set without have them in the rows or columns. If a hierarchy group already exists for the members you want to 'sum', you can merely use that group in your current view. However, you may not want to create a hierarchy group for an hoc report and so you'll be interested in using comma delimited members in the page key range. 1.

Run a new evdre report and try using multiple STORE# separated by commas to see how evdre aggregation functions. a)

Set your current view as you see below:


182


2010

BPC430


Figure 238: Multi member CV

b)

Use the EVDRE function in cell A1: Create a new workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Refresh workbook → Ok.

c)

In the page key range, enter the STORE1 entity member and use the refresh workbook option to see the results: In H4 → Enter → STORE1 → Format the cell light gray with an outline border → Refresh workbook:

Figure 239: Multi member: Store1


2010


183


d)

BPC430

In the page key range, enter the STORE2 entity member and use the refresh workbook option to see the results: In H4 → Enter → STORE2 → Refresh workbook:

Figure 240: Multi member: Store2

e)

In the page key range, enter the STORE1 & 2 entity members and use the refresh workbook option to see the results: In H4 → Enter → STORE1,STORE2 → Refresh workbook:

Figure 241: Multi member: Store1 & 2

f)

Let's see if we can work with parent members in the page key range as well, In the page key range, enter the CONSMALL,CONMID entity parent members and use the refresh workbook option to see the results: In H4 → Enter → CONSMALL,CONMID→ Refresh workbook:


184


2010

BPC430


Figure 242: Multi member: CONSMALL,CONMID

g)

Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports →Multiple Members→ Save.

Task 5: Multi Sheet Expansions You need to analyze expense over time for your entities. Use the EVDRE sheet expansion to display entities in the sheets for example. 1.

Go into the EVDRE builder and set entity to spread across worksheets, run the function and expand all to see your results. Try the LDEP(1,CONSMALL) entity memberset to populate the sheets with base level members. Then, see how flexible the sheet expansion is by placing time in the sheet expansion. a)



2010


185


BPC430

Figure 243: Sheet expansion: CV

b)

In the EVDRE builder select Entity to be expanded into the sheets: In a blank workbook → Enter the EVDRE formula into A1 → Refresh workbook → Select Entity by using the drop down for the 'spread across worksheets' option:


186


2010

BPC430


Figure 244: Multi Sheet: Builder

c)

Select Ok → Expand all → Go to the 1st sheet which contains CONSTORE_TYPE (that's where you'll also find the control panel which controls all the sheets):

Figure 245: Multi Sheet: Expansion 3


2010


187


BPC430

Figure 246: Multi Sheet: Initial results

d)

Try changing the entity memberset in D17 to include the dependants of 'CONSMALL': Enter an entity memberset of 'LDEP(1,CONSMALL) → Expand all:

Figure 247: Multi Sheet: DEP of CONSMALL

e)

In the 1st sheet, put time in the sheets and measures in the columns as follows:


188


2010

BPC430


Figure 248: Multi Sheet: Time expansion

f)

Expand all:

Figure 249: Multi Sheet: Time in Sheets

g)

Go to the 'control' sheet and turn off the row and column key display: In the 1st sheet → Enter 'Y' to hide the row and column keys → Expand all:


2010


189


BPC430

Figure 250: Multi Sheet: Hide Keys

h)

Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports →Multi Sheet→ Save.

Task 6: EVDRE Memberselection Quiz & Drag and Drop You need a report which displays labor accounts by STORE10 and then STORE1 in the rows with the quarters and then annual total for 2009 in the columns. 1.

Create a new EVDRE report to produce the result shown below. a)

Use the following current view.


190


2010

BPC430


Figure 251: EVDRE Memberset Quiz

b)

You can reproduce this result without using a different current view?


2010


191


BPC430

Figure 252: EVDRE Memberset Quiz

Hint: For time, use two memberset key words to select dependants and the time current view member itself. Hint: For entity, use a comma delimited list. Hint: For account, enter BAS('the parent account you need') in D17. 2.

EVDRE Drag & Drop (Optional) a)

In the Excel Interface, set your current view:

Figure 253: EVDRE Drag & Drop CV

b)

Home → Reporting and analysis → Build a report using drag and drop → Drag the 'evdre data grid' to C3:


192


2010

BPC430


Figure 254: EVDRE Drag & Drop: Initial report

c)

'Start designing' → Drag entity into the rows → Drag P_Acct out → Preview report → You should see a single value for constore_type.

d)

Set the row memberset to bas for consmall: Select 'start designing' → Edit membersets → Select Entity → Clear member set → Add memberset selection rules → BAS → Set consmall as the default member → continue twice → Preview Report: Caution: Delete the contents of cell D20.


2010


193


BPC430

Figure 255: EVDRE Drag & Drop: Modified entity memberset (your values may vary)

e)

Use the same steps to change the column memberset for time to BAS but without any defaults:

Figure 256: EVDRE Drag & Drop: Modified time memberset (your values may vary)

f)

194

eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports → 'EVDRE Wizard' → Save.


2010

BPC430


Exercise 4: EVDRE Options Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Suppress technical member id's. • Use EVDRE row and column Suppression. • Suppress accounts with no actuals while planning on budget values. • Display the top or bottom members based on their value. • Learn how to insert members easily. • Display blank values as zeroes. • Work with the column autofit switch. • Use the option key words without the option range.

Business Example Reporting always comes down to properties and settings in your templates. EVDRE is no exception. To be able to use EVDRE templates successfully you need to know how to use the 'Options' that EVDRE has to offer.

Task 1: Autofit, Display keys, Top/Bottom filters Learn how to display the top and bottom members based on value. Hide or display member keys in the rows and columns. 1.

Log on to Excel from the Admin console.

2.

In the SALES application of the BPC430_## Appset, Go into the Excel Interface and set your current view as you see below and then use the =evdre() formula to create a report template.

Task 2: Suppression In order to focus on important information, it is sometimes useful to suppress zeroes. 1.

Use the suppression options in your control panel along with the related 'show null as zero' options to create more meaningful reports.


2010


195


BPC430

Task 3: Inserting members Users need to be able to add members on the fly when planning. (For example, when planning on a list of products with prior year values and you have a new product coming online) 1.

Use the row memberset key word 'NOEXPAND' and allow 'insert' to allow the user to 'Insert Members'

Task 4: Using option key words Just so you know, even if you do not use the option range, you can still use the option key words in the EVDRE range area. 1.

You can still use the options even if you do not turn the options range on. Launch the EVDRE builder but turn off the option range. Use the option key words to suppress row and column keys.

Task 5: EVDRE Options Quiz You need to generate a report which shows all of your labor accounts including consulting costs. And you need to figure out a way to suppress the column keys without using the option range. 1.

196

Using the current view below generate the result as shown.


2010

BPC430


Solution 4: EVDRE Options Task 1: Autofit, Display keys, Top/Bottom filters Learn how to display the top and bottom members based on value. Hide or display member keys in the rows and columns. 1.

Log on to Excel from the Admin console. a)

Log onto Excel:In the Admin Console → Select 'Available Interfaces' on the lower right → 'Interface for Excel' → If necessary, select the BPC430_## Appset and the SALES application:

Figure 257: BPC430 Log in (Your appset is BPC430_##)

2.

In the SALES application of the BPC430_## Appset, Go into the Excel Interface and set your current view as you see below and then use the =evdre() formula to create a report template. a)

In the 'Interface for Excel' set your current view: Expand your current view and select the members shown below:


2010


197


BPC430

Figure 258: EVDRE - Fundamentals CV

b)

Open up a blank workbook: Goto the 'windows button' on the upper left → Select 'new' to create a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter '=evdre()' → Enter → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh Workbook → Confirm that 'Enable Options Range' is selected.

c)

Run the function and go into the control panel: Select OK → Open the control panel by opening the column 'group' via the plus sign in column D→ Select the BAS memberset option for the row and column:


198


2010

BPC430


Figure 259: EVDRE - Options: Control Panel

d)

Observe the option range: Scroll down to row 24 to see the default option range → Note that the AutofitCol is the only option activated by default:


2010


199


BPC430

Figure 260: Default Option Range

e)

Take a look at the initial result set: Expand all:

Figure 261: Initial Options Report

f)

Turn off the autofit option, set the columns to a width of 12: Remove the 'Y' from B25 → Set columns G, H, and I to a width of 12 → Expand all → The widths should remain at 12 since you turned off autofitcol.


200


2010

BPC430


Figure 262: No Auto Fit

g)

The users have requested you to suppress the technical id's: Enter 'Y' into B29 and B30 to suppress the display of row and column keys → Expand all:

Figure 263: Suppress row and column keys

h)

The business user would like an easy way to select the bottom 5 accounts in the 1st quarter based on value: Enter 5 into B26 → Expand all:


2010


201


BPC430

Figure 264: Bottom 5

i)

Save your template: eTools → save dynamic templates → company → reports → Bottom 5 → Save → Leave the file open.

Task 2: Suppression In order to focus on important information, it is sometimes useful to suppress zeroes. 1.

Use the suppression options in your control panel along with the related 'show null as zero' options to create more meaningful reports. a)

The business users want to see '0' if an account has no value: Enter 'Y' into the 'show nulll as zero' option in B34 → Remove the #5 for the 'bottom' option → Expand all:


202


2010

BPC430


Figure 265: Show null as zero

b)

Suppress any rows that have no value: Enter 'Y' in C20 to suppress accounts which have no values:

Figure 266: Suppress Rows

c)

Restrict the columns to January of 2007 and 2009, test column suppression to see if the system will suppress 2007 since there is no data: Turn off row suppression → Enter the memberset '2007.JAN,2009.JAN' into B17 → Expand all → Both years should appear → Turn on column suppression by entering 'Y' into B20 → Now only 2009 should appear:


2010


203


BPC430

Figure 267: Suppressed zeroes in columns

d)

In a planning scenario, users sometimes only need to see members in the input template which had actual values in a prior year. First, let's confirm that we have actual data in 2009: Enter 'BAS' in B17 → Expand all → Now you can see which accounts have actuals for 2009.TOTAL:

Figure 268: Accounts with Actuals for 2009.TOTAL

e)

Now set your data selection to NBUDGET (new budget) for2009.Q1 but restrict your accounts to only those which had actuals for the entire year: In C20 → Enter ACTUAL,2009.TOTAL → Turn off column suppression → Format your data cells at numeric with borders etc → Set category to → NBUDGET → Expand all: Continued on next page

204


2010

BPC430


Figure 269: Accounts with actual values in 2009

f)

Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → EVDRE Suppression→ Save.


2010


205


BPC430

Task 3: Inserting members Users need to be able to add members on the fly when planning. (For example, when planning on a list of products with prior year values and you have a new product coming online) 1.

Use the row memberset key word 'NOEXPAND' and allow 'insert' to allow the user to 'Insert Members' a)

Continue with the template you were just working on: Set the Rows to 'NOEXPAND' in C17 → And allow insert via a 'Y' in C21 → Expand all → Right click on the account description 'Consulting Costs' → EVDRE: Insert Member → In 'View members by': → Choose 'Description Only' → Select the SOCIAL CONTRIBUTIONS account:

Figure 270: Inserting members

b)

Save your template: Select 'Ok' → Not bad right? → Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → EVDRE Insert Members → Save.

Task 4: Using option key words Just so you know, even if you do not use the option range, you can still use the option key words in the EVDRE range area. 1.

You can still use the options even if you do not turn the options range on. Launch the EVDRE builder but turn off the option range. Use the option key words to suppress row and column keys. a)

Launch the EVDRE builder but do not select the 'Enable Options Range': Select Home → Reporting & Analysis → Open a blank workbook → Enter =EVDRE() into A1 → Refresh workbook: Continued on next page

206


2010

BPC430


Figure 271: Builder with option range turned off

b)

Execute the function and in the control panel use the HIDEROWKEYS and HIDECOLKEYS to suppress the member technical id's: Select Ok → In B10 → Enter HIDEROWKEYS,HIDECOLKEYS → Expand all:

Figure 272: Use the option key words


2010


207


c)

BPC430

Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports → EVDRE Option Key Words → Save. Note: If you want to use the option range but you forgot to turn it on, you can also copy the option range from another EVDRE template and reference if from B20 by the EVRNG function.

Task 5: EVDRE Options Quiz You need to generate a report which shows all of your labor accounts including consulting costs. And you need to figure out a way to suppress the column keys without using the option range. 1.

Using the current view below generate the result as shown. a)


Figure 273: EVDRE Options Quiz

b)

Create your own EVDRE report but turn off the 'enable options range'. Insert 'consulting costs as shown without typing it in! Suppress the keys for time without manually hiding the row.


208


2010

BPC430


Figure 274: EVDRE Options Quiz - Result

Hint: To suppress the time keys, use the appropriate keyword in B10. Hint: To insert consulting costs, set the account expansion to 'noexpand' and allow inserts. Save your template: Goto eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Reports → EVDRE Option Quiz → Save.

2010


209


210


BPC430

2010

BPC430


Exercise 5: EVDRE Formatting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform quick and easy formatting of the data cells. • Learn how to work with the EVDRE Formatting table. • Use existing formatted templates to easily copy styles.

Business Example You are responsible for developing report and input schedule templates and you need to know about all of the formatting options to make your results look as professional as possible and also to help business users identify 'information' very quickly.

Task 1: Formatting Data Cells Use a formatting cell to format data cells for one or more EVDRE templates at once. 1.

Access the 'Interface for Excel' for the BPC430_## Appset and SALES application and set your current view as follows: Category

BUDGET

Entity

CONSTORE_TYPE

Product

DOGBALL

P_Acct

CE0004000

Rpt Currency

LC

Time

2009.TOTAL

Measure

PERIODIC

The business scenario calls for one data formatting cell that can be used to apply formatting to multiple EVDRE's in a workbook. Launch an EVDRE report and use a formatting cell referenced to the EVDRE function to format the data cells from one central cell.


2010


211


BPC430

Task 2: The EVDRE Style Sheet Use the EVDRE six column 'style sheet' to format various row, column, and data areas of a report by applying your styles to keys and headings. 1. 2.

Launch the EVDRE builder and turn on the formatting option to see the default formats. Now let's start to work with the 6 column 'style sheet'.

Task 3: Use Existing Format Templates Create an EVDRE template with formatting copied from your formatting template. 1.

212

Launch the EVDRE builder and import your formatting template.


2010

BPC430


Solution 5: EVDRE Formatting Task 1: Formatting Data Cells Use a formatting cell to format data cells for one or more EVDRE templates at once. 1.

Access the 'Interface for Excel' for the BPC430_## Appset and SALES application and set your current view as follows: Category

BUDGET

Entity

CONSTORE_TYPE

Product

DOGBALL

P_Acct

CE0004000

Rpt Currency

LC

Time

2009.TOTAL

Measure

PERIODIC


2010


213


BPC430

The business scenario calls for one data formatting cell that can be used to apply formatting to multiple EVDRE's in a workbook. Launch an EVDRE report and use a formatting cell referenced to the EVDRE function to format the data cells from one central cell. a)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Check 'Enable options range' → Ok → Open up the column group.

b)

We want to use a cell to serve as a placeholder for data formatting for one or more EVDRE's. (We'll use the EVDRE style sheet next, this is a very nice low maintenance technique.) Left click in cell D1 → Right click → Format cells → Format the cell as numeric, zero decimals, ',' for thousands, outline border, no color fill → Ok → In cell B9 → Enter =EVRNG(D1) → Enter → Expand all:

Figure 275: Format Cell Results

c)

Save your template on the BPC Server: Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Cell Format Range → Save.


214


2010

BPC430


Task 2: The EVDRE Style Sheet Use the EVDRE six column 'style sheet' to format various row, column, and data areas of a report by applying your styles to keys and headings. 1.

Launch the EVDRE builder and turn on the formatting option to see the default formats. a)

Launch an EVDRE template with formatting turned on: Go 'Home' → Reporting & Analysis → Open a blank workbook → In cell A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Refresh workbook → De-select 'Enable Options Range' → Select 'Enable formatting range' → 'Use default formatting':

Figure 276: Formatting Grid

b)

Execute the function, then hard code CONSTORE_TYPE and CE0004000 in the page key range and set the membersets to ALL,SELF: Select Ok → Enter: CONSTORE_TYPE in the page key range in cell K4 for Entity → Format the cell with a light gray fill → Hard code CE0004000 in K7 → Format the cell with a light gray fill → Open the column group → Enter the memberset 'ALL,SELF' in both B17 and C17 → Expand all → Now you can see the default formatting which includes a style for calculated members of a white font and color pattern for example:


2010


215


BPC430

Figure 277: Default formats with time in columns

2.

Now let's start to work with the 6 column 'style sheet'. a)

The business user has requested a template with Entity in the columns that formats based on Entity hierarchy levels, so put Entity in the columns: Use the drop down in B16 to select Entity for the columns→ Expand all.

b)

Format the data cell and delete all of the other parameters so we can get a fresh start: Format C26 as Numeric → Comma for thousands separator → Dotted line outline border → No color fill → Clear all contents and formatting in A27:F40 → Because we only want to apply this style to the data cells → Enter 'DATA' in F26 → Expand all → See the results (in the data cells) below: Note: Previously existing styles will remain until they are addressed (coming right up).


216


2010

BPC430


Figure 278: Formatting grid with 'Data' formatted

c)

Input the formatting parameters for the columns as shown below in A28:F32: → Expand all. Note: The entries in C28:32 are not required but come in handy to preview the formatting.

Figure 279: Formatting grid with 'Data' & Col's formatted

C28

Ok as is

C29

Bold

C30

Dark grey fill, white bold font

C31

Light grey fill


2010


217


C32

d)

BPC430

Light grey fill, dotted line outline border, numeric, thousands separator, no decimals

Input the formatting parameters for the rows as shown below in A34:F39 → Use the paint brush (copy formatting from a clear cell like H6) to clear all (left over) formats from H11:I12 → Expand all.

Figure 280: Formatting grid with 'Data', Coll's, & Rows formatted

C34

Ok as is

C35

Bold

C36

Dark grey fill, white bold font

C37

Light grey fill

C38

Light grey fill, bold, dotted line outline border

C39

Light grey fill, numeric, thousands separator, no decimals, dotted line border

Figure 281: Formatting grid results - personal costs


218


2010

BPC430


e)

Let's experiment a little bit, put all of the CE0001000 accounts into the rows, set the Entity memberset to BAS,Self: Enter CE0001000 into K7 → Set the Entity memberset to BAS,Self in B17 → Expand all:

Figure 282: Formatting grid results - all accounts

f)

Save your template on the BPC Server: Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → EVDRE Format Style Sheet → Save → Close the file.

Task 3: Use Existing Format Templates Create an EVDRE template with formatting copied from your formatting template. 1.

Launch the EVDRE builder and import your formatting template. a)

Go 'Home' → Reporting & Analysis → Open a blank workbook → In cell A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Refresh workbook → De-select 'Options' (we'll use those later) → Select 'Enable formatting range' → 'Import style from server' → Select your 'EVDRE FORMAT STYLE SHEET':


2010


219


BPC430

Figure 283: Formatting: Import style from server

b)

Select Ok → Voila!:

Figure 284: Formatting - Import style results

220


2010

BPC430


Exercise 6: EVDRE Sorting and Ranges Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how EVDRE sorting can easily be used to generate breaks and sub totals for example. • Use before and after ranges to separate your data and also to sub total. • Work with row and column key ranges to precisely control report output.

Business Example Since the EVDRE in a range based tool, we need to use before and after ranges to break the data into 'sections' for better presentation. We'll also use this technique to generate sub totals. In addition, when static type reports are needed you will find that you can manually control the row and column keys for fixed format reports.

Task 1: EVDRE Sorting Learn how to use the EVDRE sorting feature for range breaks and sub totalling. 1.

The user wants a report that sub totals accounts by entity: Use the EVDRE builder to automatically insert line breaks and sub totals.

2.

In this next challenge, we need to create an account by entity report that sorts and totals by currency.

Task 2: EVDRE Before and After Ranges Use before and after ranges to separate report results into 'sections', use range based formatting, and sub totaling. 1.

The business users you support have requested several reports lately which call for reports which break data into sections so that it is easier to read and to generate sub totals.

2.

Now we need to learn how to set up column totals in case we don't have a hierarchy node to do that for us.


2010


221


BPC430

Task 3: Row and Column Key Ranges Use EVDRE to automatically generate row and column key ranges for more static type scenarios. 1.

The business users have requested a report which shows dynamic account lists by (relatively) fixed entities.

2.

Now, for our next challenge, the users need to see multiple sections of the same accounts however for different time frames.:

Task 4: Static Columns Next you need to create a 'plan vs. actual' comparison report for the monthly value vs. year to date. 1.

Use the EVDRE builder to create a report with category, measure, and time in the columns. Delete the expansion range from the evdre formula and manually change the column key range to create the following result set:

Figure 285: Static col: Budget vs. Actual

Task 5: Measure Report Quiz Create a report which displays the period, quarter, and YTD values in the rows with each 'section' separated by one row. Turn off the display of accounts with no values. 1.

222

Use the current as shown and the page key range feature to replicate the report below.


2010

BPC430


Solution 6: EVDRE Sorting and Ranges Task 1: EVDRE Sorting Learn how to use the EVDRE sorting feature for range breaks and sub totalling. 1.

The user wants a report that sub totals accounts by entity: Use the EVDRE builder to automatically insert line breaks and sub totals. a)

Access the 'Interface for Excel' for the BPC430_## Appset and SALES application and set your current view as follows:

Figure 286: Sorting - Current View

b)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Home' → Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter '=EVDRE()' → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Make the changes as shown below to your builder → Also delete the 'EVDRE FORMAT STYLE SHEET' from the 'import style from server' box → And deselect 'Enable formatting range':


2010


223


BPC430

Figure 287: Sorting I: Builder

c)

Execute your report definition: Select Ok →Not too bad right?

Figure 288: Sorting I: Results

d)

Now, let's go see how this works: Open up the column and row group → The system automatically made the following configuration settings:


224


2010

BPC430


Figure 289: Sorting I: Control Panel

- The system generated a sorting table in A24:D28 which is referenced in B11. - The system is sorting on column F in Ascending order. - The system created an after range by using the EVRNG function for H1:J1 and consequently inserted EV_AFTER line breaks in the row key range, for example in F21. - The system inserted into H1:J1 'Total %key%' and 'evsub' and consequently inserted the 'key' of the entity (F21) with the subtotals for example in J21:N21. e) 2.

Save your template on the BPC Server: Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Sorting I→ Save.

In this next challenge, we need to create an account by entity report that sorts and totals by currency.


2010


225


a)

BPC430

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select Home → 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Add Entity above accounts in the rows → But this time, we will only turn on sorting to create the sorting table, we will configure it the way we want:

Figure 290: Sorting II: Builder

b)

Run the report, select only base member entities for the rows, and format the data cells: Select Ok to execute the EVDRE function → Select BAS for C17 → Format J13 as Numeric, no decimals, ',' for thousands, light yellow fill, dark outline border → Expand all.

c)

Configure the sorting range: Enter ENTITY.CURRENCY in B25 (so the system knows to sort and total by the currency property) → Enter =EVRNG(B30:D30) in B28 (this is the after range which will be used to total and format) → Enter 'Total %key% in B30 (so the system will generate sub total lines which say ... 'Total '. In other words, %key% does a lookup.) → Format B30:C30 a fill color of your choice with a single underline and double overline → Enter 'evsub' in D30 (to generate the sub total values) → Format D30 as numeric → no decImals → ',' for thousands → Dotted line border → A fill color of your choice: Continued on next page

226


2010

BPC430


Figure 291: Sorting II Control Panel

d)

Execute your settings: Select Expand all → Can you feel the power?


2010


227


BPC430

Figure 292: Sorting II: Results

e)

Save your template on the BPC Server: Goto eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Sorting II→ Save.

Task 2: EVDRE Before and After Ranges Use before and after ranges to separate report results into 'sections', use range based formatting, and sub totaling. 1.

The business users you support have requested several reports lately which call for reports which break data into sections so that it is easier to read and to generate sub totals. a)


Figure 293: Ranges - current view

b) Note: You will insert your evdre this time into A4.


228


2010

BPC430


Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A4 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Add Entity above accounts in the rows:

Figure 294: Ranges - Builder

c)

Select Ok → Open the control panel → Set the Entity memberset to BAS → Expand all → What could be improved in this result set?

Figure 295: Ranges - Initial Result Set


2010


229


BPC430

d)

The opportunity in this case is: The Entity id is showing up repetitively → And it is difficult see where one entity stops and the next one starts.

e)

To remedy this, use a before range which reads an 'EVDES' function which references Entity column 'F': Delete the contents of column H since the before range will perform that function now → Enter =EVDES(F1) in H1 → Format H1:N1 bold italics, Outline border. Note: The EVDES function will correctly say '#nodata' at this point.

f)

In the before range expansion, enter a formula that references the evdes function and formatting in H1:N1: Enter SHEET1!(H1:N1) in D22:

Figure 296: Before range expansion

g)

Expand all → You may receive an EVDRE warning → Select 'disable the prompt next time':

Figure 297: Ranges - EVDRE message

h)

Select 'Yes' to see the results:


230


2010

BPC430


Figure 298: Ranges - Before range result

i)

Now, the users want to see sub totals for each entity, use the 'after range' for that along with an EVSUM key word: In H2 → Enter: 'Total' → In J2:N2 → Enter: EVSUM → Format H2:N2 bold italitcs, white font with a dark blue fill for example → numeric, ',' for thousands, no decimals, border outline: Use the after range to call your functions and formatting in H2:N2: In D23 → Enter: SHEET1!H2:N2


2010


231


BPC430

Figure 299: Ranges - After range expansion

2.

j)

Execute your after range: Expand all → You should now have sub totals!

k)

Save your template on the server: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → EVDRE Before After Ranges → Save

Now we need to learn how to set up column totals in case we don't have a hierarchy node to do that for us. a)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Drag Entity into the column → Remove Time → Turn off 'Enable options range':


232


2010

BPC430


Figure 300: Column Total builder

b)

Hard code two stores into the rows, we need to generate a column total for them: Enter 'STORE1,STORE2' into the Entity memberset.

c)

This time we will use the column after range to total up the two stores: In B19 → Enter SHEET1!A24:A25 → In A24 → Enter 'Total' → Enter 'EVSUM' in A25 → Format A24-25 yellow fill → right justify → outline border → numeric, ',' for thousands, no decimals:


2010


233


BPC430

Figure 301: Ranges - column total expansion

d)

Format G13: numeric, ',' for thousands, no decimals, border outline, no color fill → Expand all:

Figure 302: Ranges - Column total result

e)

eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Column Totals → Save.


234


2010

BPC430


Task 3: Row and Column Key Ranges Use EVDRE to automatically generate row and column key ranges for more static type scenarios. 1.

The business users have requested a report which shows dynamic account lists by (relatively) fixed entities. a)


Figure 303: Row Key Range - current view

b)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Drag Entity into the rows above accounts → Turn off 'Enable options range' if necessary → Ok:

c)

Take a look at the row key range the system generated: Open the control panel → Left click on B6:


2010


235


BPC430

Figure 304: Row key range initial

d)

Initially, we'll have two stores, so you need to add to the existing row key range: Go into the B6 formula → Add the range F18:G21 to it as you see below:


236


2010

BPC430


Figure 305: Row key range - 2 row key ranges

e)

The users want STORE2 above STORE1, so you will assign these members each of the two row key ranges as follows: In C17 → Enter 'STORE2|STORE1': Note: The 'pipe' symbol is on the back slash key on most key boards.

Figure 306: Row key expansion

f)

Execute your new report: Set time to 2009.TOTAL → Expand all:


2010


237


BPC430

Figure 307: Row key range: Result

g)

The two entities are hard coded and therefore static in this scenario, but the accounts are not: Set the account dimension to CE0001000 → Expand all:

Figure 308: Row key range: Total Cost

h)

Set p_acct back to CE0004000 → Expand all.

i)

You may also want to see more than two row key ranges, so add a 3rd row key range and set them to display STORE1, STORE10, and STORE15: In B6 → Add F23:G26 to the formula → In C17 → Enter: 'STORE1|STORE10|STORE15' → Expand all:


238


2010

BPC430


Figure 309: Row key range: 3 Entites

j) 2.

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Row key ranges → Save.

Now, for our next challenge, the users need to see multiple sections of the same accounts however for different time frames.: a)

Access the 'Interface for Excel' for the BPC430_## Appset → SALES application → Set your current view as follows:


2010


239


BPC430

Figure 310: Row col key range: CV

b)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook: Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook


240


2010

BPC430


Figure 311: Row col key range: Bulder

c)

Add a second row key range to achieve this result: Set the column memberset to BAS → In B6 → Add the E21:E24 range to the row keys → Expand all:


2010


241


BPC430

Figure 312: Row col key range- 2 row key ranges

d)

Include the base members for Q1 and Q2 of 2009 to the col memberset: Enter the memberset as shown below into B17:

Figure 313: Row col key range: Expansion

e)

Set up the column keys: Add G19:I19 to the column key range in B5 → Copy the contents in G11:I12 to G19:I20 → Enter 2009.APR in G19, 2009.MAY in H19,2009.JUN in I19 → Refresh workbook:


242


2010

BPC430


Figure 314: Row col key range: Result

f)

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports → Row Col key ranges → Save.

Task 4: Static Columns Next you need to create a 'plan vs. actual' comparison report for the monthly value vs. year to date. 1.

Use the EVDRE builder to create a report with category, measure, and time in the columns. Delete the expansion range from the evdre formula and manually change the column key range to create the following result set:

Figure 315: Static col: Budget vs. Actual


2010


243


a)

BPC430

Access the 'Interface for Excel' for the BPC430_## Appset → SALES application → Set your current view as follows:

Figure 316: Static Col: CV

b)

Launch the EVDRE builder in a blank workbook Select 'Reporting & Analysis' → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Enter =EVDRE() → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Add category and measure to the columns → Put measures first → Time second → And category third:


244


2010

BPC430


Figure 317: Static Col: Builder

c)

Run the report and then set the category memberset to BUDGET and ACTUAL: Select Ok → Open the control panel → Enter 'BUDGET,ACTUAL' into the category memberset → Expand all:

Figure 318: Static Col: Initial Result

d)

In this scenario, we won't need to expand this report again, so let's turn 'expansion' off: Delete the A17:E23 range from the EVDRE formula as shown below: Continued on next page

2010


245


BPC430

Figure 319: Static col: Delete expansion formula

e)

Now let's clean up the control panel by deleting the expansion range: Delete the contents, comments, formats in A16:E23:

Figure 320: Static col: deleted expansion range

f)

Now we'll use a combination of EVDRE and native excel to create the final report: Delete the contents in K11:23 → Enter: 'Variance' in K16 → Add an excel formula below K16 to calculate Budget minus Actual → Copy to row 23 → Format the variance column with a fill of light gray.

g)

Type '2009.JUN' into I12 and J12 → Refresh workbook → Do you see how the system now is selecting data based on what you put into the col key range!? Continued on next page

246


2010

BPC430


h)

Insert a blank column after K for separation.

i)

Use the same technique as above to set up the YTD columns →Also input 'YTD' into M11 and N11 → Set time in the YTD columns to be 2009.JUN → Delete any unnecessary columns → Refresh workbook:

Figure 321: Static Col: Budget vs. Actual

j)

Let's experiment a little more by substituting in Forecast: Enter 'FORECAST' in place of 'BUDGET' in row 13 → Refresh workbook → Expand the variances columns → Can you see how easy it would be to manually (or with macros) change a report?

Figure 322: Static Col: Forecast vs. Actual

k)

Save the template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Forecast vs Actual → Save.

Task 5: Measure Report Quiz Create a report which displays the period, quarter, and YTD values in the rows with each 'section' separated by one row. Turn off the display of accounts with no values. 1.

2010

Use the current as shown and the page key range feature to replicate the report below. Continued on next page


247


a)

BPC430


Figure 323: Measure Report Quiz - CV

b)

Format the data cells, add two row key ranges, and change the memberset for time:


248


2010

BPC430


Figure 324: Measures Report Quiz - Result

Hint: Format the upper left cell of the data range as shown. Hint: Suppress accounts with zero values. Hint: Add two row key ranges for the PERIODIC|QTD|YTD memberset. c)

2010

Save your template as 'Measures Quiz'.


249


250


BPC430

2010

BPC430


Exercise 7: Advanced EVDRE Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to use hierarchy based indentation. • Build a workbook for multiple applications. • Configure a report which uses multiple EVDRE functions to optimize performance.

Business Example Someone on your project team needs to have advanced EVDRE skills. In this case, we'll work with indentation, cross application, and multiple EVDRE functions.

Task 1: Hierarchy based indentation Use hierarchy metadata to drive indentation of your row expansion. 1.

Use the REPT and EVPRO functions to indent your rows in the following report.

Task 2: Cross application reporting Use multiple EVDRE functions that call data from different applications. 1.

You need a report which displays data for both the sales and planning application in one workbook.

Task 3: Multiple EVDRE Use multiple EVDRE functions to optimize performance. The concept of this lab is to use two evdre functions, the first will retrieve data (although not that much for our purposes so this is a conceptual exercise) and the second will be used to send data. 1.

In the Excel Interface: set up your first evdre which will be for reading data only. If prompted during the lab, clear existing data.

2.

Set up your second evdre which will be for sending data only. If prompted during the lab, clear existing data. Also, respond 'yes' when warned about overwriting existing evdre's and disable the prompt.


2010


251


BPC430

Task 4: Modify an existing EVDRE When using the EVDRE builder, sometimes you may forget to select multiple dimensions for the rows for example and instead of starting over you would like to change the report definition. Of course this may enhance your understanding of how the function works. 1.

252

Create an initial report with P_Acct in the rows. After rendering the function, add entity to the row key range. To do this, you will need to modify the EVDRE expand range and the row key range.


2010

BPC430


Solution 7: Advanced EVDRE Task 1: Hierarchy based indentation Use hierarchy metadata to drive indentation of your row expansion. 1.

Use the REPT and EVPRO functions to indent your rows in the following report. a)

Use the following current view:

Figure 325: Advanced DRE Indent - CV

b)

Insert an EVDRE function in A1 with Entity in the rows instead of P_ACCT: Open up the control panel → Set the entity memberset to ALL → Expand all.


2010


253


BPC430

Figure 326: Advanced DRE Indent: ALL in rows, no indentation

c)

In D12 → Enter 'HLEVEL'.

d)

In D13 → Insert function → Planning and Consolidation → EVPRO:

Figure 327: Advanced DRE Indent: EVPRO Function

e)

Select Ok → Copy the function to row 39:


254


2010

BPC430


Figure 328: Advanced DRE Indent: EVPRO Result

f)

In F13 → Delete the existing function → Insert EVDES as follows and then add REPT with 3 spaces as shown:

Figure 329: Advanced DRE Indent: EVDES Function

g)

Copy the formula down to row 39:


2010


255


BPC430

Figure 330: Advanced DRE Indent: Indented result

Note: This looks pretty good but do you see what problem would likely occur? What if more entity dimension members are added ... past row 39? In other words our solution is not dynamic. h)

To make this a fully dynamic solution: Add the following to the F13 formula:

Figure 331: Advanced DRE Indent: REPT with EVPRO and EVDES

i)

Copy your formula down to all of your rows and save your template as 'Hierarchy Indentation'.


256


2010

BPC430


Task 2: Cross application reporting Use multiple EVDRE functions that call data from different applications. 1.

You need a report which displays data for both the sales and planning application in one workbook. a)


Figure 332: Current view

b)

Insert the first EVDRE into a1 with no option range:


2010


257


BPC430

Figure 333: Sales Application

c)

Open the control panel → In A30 → Insert the second EVDRE → Change the current view to BUDGET → Expand all → Do both EVDRE's have BUDGET in their page key ranges? →Yes ... because both are reading the same application → But, what if you wanted the first to read actual and the second to read budget? → ...You could simply type in a different member into the page key range for category or you could use the EVMBR function!

d)

Enter 'PLANNING' in H31.

e)

The planning application does not have a product dimension but it has activity and datasrc, so we need to adjust the page key range: Select E36:J45 → Move it down one row → Copy G35:I35 to row 36 → Enter P_DATASRC and P_ACTIVITY in G35 and 36 as shown → Double click the members in the page key range to make the selections below → Expand all → The planning application is empty so you should not see any data:


258


2010

BPC430


Figure 334: Planning

f)

You can position the report components anywhere you want: Move the planning EVDRE in E31:K49 header and results adjacent to SALES to L1

g)

Only the SALES EVDRE is using the current view (since it is the 'home' application): Change the current view back to actual → Expand all → The second EVDRE should still be on BUDGET!

h)

Save your template as 'Cross Applicaiton' on the company folder.

Task 3: Multiple EVDRE Use multiple EVDRE functions to optimize performance. The concept of this lab is to use two evdre functions, the first will retrieve data (although not that much for our purposes so this is a conceptual exercise) and the second will be used to send data. 1.

In the Excel Interface: set up your first evdre which will be for reading data only. If prompted during the lab, clear existing data. a)



2010


259


BPC430

Figure 335: Multi DRE: Current View

b)

Build an evdre template in 'data input' mode so the workbook is set to an input schedule type: Select 'home' → Data input → Open a blank workbook → In A1 → Insert an evdre with entity in the columns and time in the rows → Make sure the 'enable options range' is selected.

c)

Format cell D1 → Numeric → ',' for thousands → no decimals → dark line border → no fill → in the format range Cell B9 → Enter =EVRNG(D1) → Expand all → Clear data if prompted.


260


2010

BPC430


Figure 336: Multi DRE: Format data cell

d)

Use the filter builder for entity to match the following: Right click in B17 → EVDRE: Builder Filter:

Figure 337: Multi DRE: Entity Filter Builder

The goal is to include all members of H1 in CONUS except for the US elimination entity. Continued on next page

2010


261


e)

BPC430

Use the filter builder for time in C17:

Figure 338: Multi DRE: Time filter builder

f)

Here's what your 1st expansion range should look like after you expand:


262


2010

BPC430


Figure 339: Multi DRE: 1st Expansion Range & Result

2.

g)

Since the first function will only be used to retrieve reference data so we need to turn off its send feature: Enter 'Y' in B32.

h)

Leave the control panel open, Save your template as 'Multi DRE' on the company input schedule folder.

Set up your second evdre which will be for sending data only. If prompted during the lab, clear existing data. Also, respond 'yes' when warned about overwriting existing evdre's and disable the prompt. a)

In A50 → Insert an evdre with entity in the columns and time in the rows → Make sure the 'enable options range' is selected → Ok.

b)

Copy the entity memberset from B17 to B66

c)

In the 2nd evdre time memberset in C66 → Enter '2011.TOTYR' → Expand all: Note: 2011.TOTYR is a base level member but represents 2011 in total. (You could use an allocation function to disaggregate this data to months.)

Figure 340: Multi DRE: 2nd Expansion

d)

Move the 2nd page key range from G51:I58 to L2 → Enter 'Read' in G1 and 'Write' in L1 → In M3 → Delete the EVCVW formula (the second evdre must be set to a non actual category) → Insert EVMBR:


2010


263


BPC430

Figure 341: Multi DRE: EVMBR

e)

We only need one column key range, so make the 2nd evdre point to the 1st: In the 2nd column key range in B54 → Open the function → Point it to G11:Z11 → Expand all

Figure 342: Multi DRE: 2nd Column key range

f)

Since we aren't using the old column key range and descriptions: Delete the E60:Z61 values and formatting.

g)

Let's position the input area under the reference data: Move E62:Z62 to E17 → Expand all

h)

Set the 2nd evdre to the data format cell: In B58 → Enter =EVRNG(D1) → Expand all: Continued on next page

264


2010

BPC430


Figure 343: Multi DRE: Formatted Result

i)

Enter 'Y' in B29 and 30 → Expand all → Now the row and column keys should be suppressed.

j)

Enter a value of 10 for each store in row 17 → Send data → Send active workbook → Yes → Close.

Figure 344: Multi DRE: Data Sent

k)

Save your template again by overwriting the prior version of 'Multi DRE'.


2010


265


BPC430

Task 4: Modify an existing EVDRE When using the EVDRE builder, sometimes you may forget to select multiple dimensions for the rows for example and instead of starting over you would like to change the report definition. Of course this may enhance your understanding of how the function works. 1.

Create an initial report with P_Acct in the rows. After rendering the function, add entity to the row key range. To do this, you will need to modify the EVDRE expand range and the row key range. a)


Figure 345: Modify existing DRE - CV

b)

Insert your evdre into A1 without an option range.


266


2010

BPC430


Figure 346: Modify existing DRE - Initial

c)

Move F11:J16 over one column → Move H11:K16 over one column

d)

Copy column C → Right click on D → Insert copied cells → In D14 → Change it to Expansion3

e)

In C16 → Select Entity Note: If an error appears in A1, update the function in B4 via the F2 key.

f)

In B6 → Change the row key range to include column G

Figure 347: Modify existing DRE - Row key range

g)

In A1 → Add the additional dimension to the expand range as follows:


2010


267


BPC430

Figure 348: Modify existing DRE - EVDRE expand range

h)

Add EVDES: Copy H13 to I13 → Copy the function down to row 16 in column I.

i)

Copy the format for column F to G → Expand all → This is what your report definition should look like:

Figure 349: Modify existing DRE - Range result

j)

This is what your data range should look like:


268


2010

BPC430


Figure 350: Modify existing DRE - Data Range

k)

2010

Save your template as 'Modified EVDRE'


269


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create EVDRE templates with the EVDRE builder. • Work with member selections. • Use comma delimited lists. • Discuss the EVDRE filter builder. • Use multiple members in the page key range. • Do multi sheet expansions. • Create EVDRE templates via Drag & Drop Reporting. • Work with the EVDRE options. • Use EVDRE suppression. • Experiment with the member insert option. • Use the option key words. • Create your own Formatting range. • Do sorting and sub totalling. • Use the before and after range options. • Modify the row and column key ranges. • Create your own plan/actual/variance reports. • Use the drag and drop interface to build an EVDRE. • Set up hierarchy based indentation. (advanced) • Change an existing EVDRE. (advanced) • Do multi EVDRE and multi application reporting. (advanced)

270


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create EVDRE templates with the EVDRE builder. • Work with member selections. • Use comma delimited lists. • Discuss the EVDRE filter builder. • Use multiple members in the page key range. • Do multi sheet expansions. • Create EVDRE templates via Drag & Drop Reporting. • Work with the EVDRE options. • Use EVDRE suppression. • Experiment with the member insert option. • Use the option key words. • Create your own Formatting range. • Do sorting and sub totalling. • Use the before and after range options. • Modify the row and column key ranges. • Create your own plan/actual/variance reports. • Use the drag and drop interface to build an EVDRE. • Set up hierarchy based indentation. (advanced) • Change an existing EVDRE. (advanced) • Do multi EVDRE and multi application reporting. (advanced)

2010


271

Unit Summary

272

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

273

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

274

BPC430


2010

Unit 4 Planning Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

Model planning solutions. Discuss criteria regarding what to plan in which system. Work with delivered input schedules. Do manual input bottom up planning. Carry out top down planning. Run allocations. Use the commenting feature. Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. Discuss how to prevent invalid member combinations. Use the spread, trend, and weight modeling options.

Unit Contents Lesson: BPC Planning ............................................................. 276 Exercise 8: Allocation .......................................................... 345 Exercise 9: Spread Trend Weight ............................................ 355 Exercise 10: Comments ....................................................... 367 Exercise 11: The Offline Distribution Wizard................................ 385 Exercise 12: Member validation .............................................. 399

2010


275

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Lesson: BPC Planning Lesson Overview In this lesson we'll take a look at the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation planning features.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

Model planning solutions. Discuss criteria regarding what to plan in which system. Work with delivered input schedules. Do manual input bottom up planning. Carry out top down planning. Run allocations. Use the commenting feature. Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. Discuss how to prevent invalid member combinations. Use the spread, trend, and weight modeling options.

Business Example You are preparing to perform your planning in BPC for the first time and you need to know what the capabilities are and how they match up to your business requirements.

276


2010

BPC430

Lesson: BPC Planning

Modeling and Bottom Up Planning You can use the delivered dynamic input templates for bottom up planning scenarios. • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Determine what types of planning to perform in what system? What level of detail do you need to plan at? Who will be doing the 'planning'? What type of planning: Sales, Cash, Expense, etc. Will you need to disaggregate data such as: Plan by year and distribute to the months? What types of calculations? What time frame and purpose: next year / tactical or 3 year year / strategic? Are the users online or 'offline'? Where are the actuals coming from? Do you need to 'send' the results to another system? Do you need Business Process Flows for status tracking and guided navigation? Do you need work status to prevent changes to 'approved' data? Do you need to track who entered what data by dimension member?

Now we'll discuss some concepts to think about as you learn how this solution works. First we need to discuss 'what to plan where'.

2010


277

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 351: Planning: what to plan where - expense

When it comes to product cost planning as it is traditionally carried out, ECC offers the best option. The unit costs can then be extracted to BW to use in an integrated scenaro. To do fund center accounting, budgets are needed in ECC.

278


2010

BPC430


Figure 352: Planning: what to plan where - product cost / fund centers

Usually it takes a few iterations to get a consensus on the budget. You can use the category dimension to keep track of the results or each 'pass'. In addition, most companies also use category members to track revised budgets as they go through the year.

Figure 353: Planning iterations

2010


279

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

In order to keep the results separate for each phase of your planning process, you can also use the category dimension. The scenario below is popular when 'handing off ' data in headcount planning.

Figure 354: Planning process with versioning

One of the requirements in the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation is that data cannot be input against parent members. Parent member values are calculated by the system at run time.

280


2010

BPC430


Figure 355: Planning bottom up requirement: base level members

Note: Planning and Consolidation places a limit on the number of digits it can send. Currently, the number of digits that Planning and Consolidation supports when sending data is from -9999999999999.9999999 (smallest: 13 digits on the left of decimal and 7 digits to the right of the decimal) to 99999999999999.9999999 (largest: 14 digits to the left of the decimal and 7 digits to the left of the decimal). A number smaller or larger, respectively, than the valid range is either rejected or regarded as invalid in the system. Also, every record for an application must contain a base level member in the database.

2010


281

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 356: Planning bottom up requirement: all dimensions

Figure 357: Planning: Delivered Dynamic Input Templates

282


2010

BPC430


There are five delivered input templates which can be used for easy input of trial balance data or planning data: • • • • •

Account Trend: Accounts in the rows and time in columns. Entity Trend: Entity type members are in the rows and time is in the columns. Consolidating: Accounts are in the rows and entity is in the columns. Nested Row: Choose the dimensions for the rows, columns, and page, two row dimensions can be selected and they will be nested. Comparative: Accounts are in the rows and category members are in the columns with a variance column. Note: These all use EVDRE.

Work status Note: We will use work status in the BPF lab. This function allows you to lock a region (or slice) of data in an application. The work status setting overrides a user's member access privileges to write to a given region. A region of data is defined by three to five dimensions per application, one with a property called Owner. When you set up work status, you define the following: • •

• •

2010

Work States – The codes that refer to a physical state of data (such as Submitted) Level of security – The users or teams who can change data in the system, which is All, Locked (no one), Manager, or Owner. See Controlling Who Can Change Data, below. The users or teams who can change the work state, which is Owner, Manager, or Both. See Controlling Who Can Set Work Status, below. Method of data update – The manner in which the customer updates data. See Method of Update, below. Push – Equivalent to the check box Include all children when setting work states, the option allows you to set one work status code to all children of a member (this does not set the selected parent member, in the NetWeaver version).


283

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 358: Planning work status: error

Figure 359: Planning work status architecture

284


2010

BPC430


Figure 360: Planning work status: owners and managers

For a more permanent solution, the security member access profiles can be used to prevent data changes. However, security is not as dynamic as work status is.

Figure 361: Planning: member access profile

Logic Overview Note: Logic is covered in more detail in the BPC410 and BPC420 classes. From an overview perspective, there are three types of logic to consider.

2010


285

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 362: Types of Logic

Figure 363: Planning logic worksheet example

Dimension logic, which is also known as member formulas, allows you to create and execute formulas and calculations on dimension members.

286


2010

BPC430


Figure 364: Planning logic dimension example

Figure 365: Planning logic dimension results

You can perform script logic calculations on base level members only. In addition, logic is application-specific. Planning and Consolidation provides a library of MDX formulas, and the ApShell application set is pre-configured with a number of logic functions.

2010


287

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 366: Planning script logic example

288


2010

BPC430


Figure 367: Planning script logic integration

Note: In the BPF lab, we will use a package that runs script logic. • • • •

// denote comments. '*' indicates executable lines of code. No '.' at the end of statements. '#' is used in MDX statements to denote the receiver of the calculation.

Dimension member formulas give you the ability to define very powerful MDX formulas for calculating Account dimension members for example. Dimension member formulas are defined at the Application Set level, thus they are valid across all applications which use the dimension. Script logic is defined within each application and is used to calculate data and to run abap programs. Calculations defined for a specific member ID creates base level data in the application. This is proprietary SQL logic not Microsoft SQL. Default logic is used when you want the formula to record results for every data send.

2010


289

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

You can use worksheet formulas and macros to create a convenient launch pad to run jobs and do analysis of the results. • •

.LGF' - an ASCII file that you use to create/edit your logic calculations and is accessed through the Script Logic editor in the Admin Console. .LGX - the compiled logic file. Created by the system when you validate and save your logic. This is an executable version of the logic. You can use the script logic tester in UJKT to see this. The compiled file is without comments and it converts system constants.

Default logic is a special logic statement that is executed on every writeback to an application. All logic in Default.LGF is run after data is sent. Having all of your logic in the Default.LGF logic file might become unmanageable however. Therefore you can create other logic files, such as FXTrans.LGF for foreign currency translation and use an INCLUDE statement in the default logic to execute it real-time rather than having to run a separate batch process. Hint: Use transaction code 'UJKT' to do logic debugging! Note: The NetWeaver logic files can be accessed by using the t-code UJFS. Note: Note: If you change the code in a logic file, you must validate and save that file before the changes will be reflected in any other logic file that references it. Here are the NetWeaver rule statements that are available. You can access the definitions of each one by going to www.help.sap.com SAP Business User → EPM Solutions → Business Planning and Consolidation → SAP BPC 7.0, Version for SAP NetWeaver → Open → Application Help → English (for example)→ Business calculations → Logic → Voila!. Here are some of the operators you can use: *ADD / *ENDADD *BEGIN / *END *FOR / *NEXT *FUNCTION / *ENDFUNCTION *SUB( ) / *ENDSUB *INCLUDE *REC *RUN_ALLOCATION

290


2010

BPC430


*SELECT *SELECTCASE / *ENDSELECT *WHEN / *ENDWHEN *XDIM_MEMBERSET *XDIM_ADDMEMBERSET *XDIM_MAXMEMBERS *COMMIT Let's consider the components of script logic.

Figure 368: SQL Script Logic: Components

Figure 369: Planning logic summary

2010


291

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Using Custom Buttons and MNU Commands You can use EvMNU functions and VBA macros to define a workbook that can contain a list of reports, input schedules, or tasks pertaining to your specific business processes. You build these workbooks in the interface for Excel using the EvMNU function, which leverages the standard Planning and Consolidation MNU commands. You can create one or more menus for end users, or you can add their functionality to any report or input schedule. The use of EvMNU functions vs. MNU macros in VBA is a design decision. VBA macros provide the ability to combine a series of tasks and present the user with a single button for selection. While an evMNU function is a click action in a worksheet cell, it may be less user friendly, but just as effective. The design of the commands allows experienced VBA users to write custom macros that combine both standard Planning and Consolidation and Microsoft Excel tasks. Menu commands are custom functions that can be used in VBA or within the Excel function EvMNU(). Most of them begin with MNU_. The EvMNU() function is an actionable Excel formula that is used within an Excel workbook, reports, or input schedules. These functions can be used for a variety of tasks such as to open other reports or input schedules, show the current view settings for dimensions, or link to Web content and documents. An EvMNU function is a click action in a worksheet cell that may require more user input. Let's take a look at how you can use MNU Commands to create input templates. •

Set a current view to a specific member for specified dimensions. There is no display name in this example. EvMNU(“SETCV”,,”ENTITY=SalesUS;TIME=2004.JAN”) Note: There is an example with screen shots coming up in just a few pages.

•

•

292

Create a hyper link named Analysis that opens the A01Entity.xls workbook: EvMNU("OPENFILE","Analysis",,"/REPORTS/WIZARD/Reports/Wizard/Local/Analysis/A01Entity.xlt") String multiple EvMNU functions together using the & operator. You can set the current view for a file you are opening like this: =EVMNU("SETCV",,"CATEGORY=PLAN;TIME=2005.Q4")&EVMNU("OPENFILE","open file","/REPORTS/WIZARD/Local/Analysis/A01Entity.xlt")


2010

BPC430


Figure 370: Planning labor

Figure 371: Planning: send data

2010


293

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 372: Planning: calc labor

Figure 373: Planning: calc benefits

294


2010

BPC430


Figure 374: Planning: result

Figure 375: Planning: insert function

2010


295

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 376: Planning: evmnu esubmit

Note: Parameter is the macro parameter. Some macros require information, such as file names or member names in order to function properly.

Figure 377: Planning: evmnu run package

296


2010

BPC430


Figure 378: Planning: setcv

In Excel 2007, you may need to turn on the developers tab.

Figure 379: Planning: push button dev option

2010


297

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 380: Planning: push button - insert button

Figure 381: Planning: push button macro and result

Allocations Allocations can be used to disaggregate anything from general overhead to corporate cash. The need for allocations is generally for overhead but they can be used for any type of planning.

298


2010

BPC430


In the example below, values are being allocation from the parent to four different subsidiaries based on %'s. The values are based on accounts 1-3 but account #4 is being used as the sending account.

Figure 382: Planning: Allocation Concept

Sometimes the need to do an allocation stems from a scenario where the initial data input is against base level members being used in lieu of parents.

Figure 383: Planning - parent level option

2010


299

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

In the example below, the data (50,000) is being input for a base level member representing the parent. Script logic is then used to distribute the values to the individual counties based on actual data.

Figure 384: Planning - Top Down Allocation: Results

This is the cool part where a business user could run a data manager package to identify the amount, source, and target for the allocation.

300


2010

BPC430


Figure 385: Planning - Top Down Allocation: The user inputs the amount, source and target!

This is the code for the scenario above.

Figure 386: Planning - Top Down Allocation: Code

2010


301

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 387: Planning - Allocation Usage and Description

Note: There are several 'How To' papers in sdn.sap.com on allocations including one on 'Top Down Allocation'.

302


2010

BPC430


Figure 388: Planning - Allocation Logic Components

Note: Factor (Optional) : • • • • •

Omitted - factor will always default to 1, Using and Total columns are ignored. Numerical values such as 2 – What x 2 Using – What is multiplied by Using. Total column is ignored. Using/Total – What is multiplied by Using/Total 1/COUNT – Divided evenly among 1/count of where members Hint: There is an OSS note on Allocations: 1318471. There are also several how to papers. Caution: Any software coding and/or code lines / strings ("Code") included in this documentation are only examples and are not intended to be used in a productive system environment. The Code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules of certain coding. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the Code given herein, and SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the usage of the Code, except if such damages were caused by SAP intentionally or grossly negligent. Below you can see the result of running a simple allocation. The total amount in this case was split proportionately between the two Entities based on labor hours.

2010


303

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 389: Planning Allocation Example - One Account

If you break the script logic down into tabular form, it helps to understand it better.

Figure 390: Planning allocation table

25,000 in total was entered for social contributions for the first profit center, then the system allocated it based on the relative amount of labor hours.

304


2010

BPC430


Figure 391: Planning: How the allocation works - Part I

Figure 392: Planning: How the allocation works Part II

2010


305

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 393: Planning - Example of a Summary Allocation: Code

Figure 394: Planning - Example of a Summary Allocation: Results

Spread, Trend, & Weight Planners will occasionally have a need to easily manipulate their data in excel. The spread trend and weight modeling options are built in functions that you can use without any configuration or programming. They can be accessed in the Excel Interface by selecting the Data Input option or via the eSubmit menu.

306


2010

BPC430


The Spread modeling option allows you to take a value and allocate it among selected destination cells. The value can be allocated equally, or it can be weighted by a range of values. For example, you can take the value 100 and spread it across a number of columns that represent each month of the year. Here's a simple example.

Figure 395: Planning: Spread - Initial Value

Spread Options Feature

Description

Source Value

The total value to be spread.

Destination

The cells to which the system writes the results of the spread.

Weights (optional feature)

A range containing weight values to apply to the spread. This range contains the same number of cells as the destination range.

Add to Existing Values (optional feature)

Select this checkbox to take the spread amount to each cell and add it to any existing values already in the destination range. If you leave it blank, the amount spread to each cell overwrites the amounts in the destination cells.

Below you can see the dialog box for the spread option.

2010


307

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 396: Planning: Spread - Equal

Figure 397: Planning: Spread - Equal Result

You can also used distribution factors to spread the data as you can see below.

Figure 398: Planning: Spread - Distribution result

308


2010

BPC430


The Trend modeling option takes a value or percentage and grows it by a factor among selected cells. This option places the source value in the first cell of the destination range. Each subsequent cell in the destination increases by the amount or percentage specified.

Figure 399: Planning: Trend - 5% Selections

Figure 400: Planning: Trend - 5% Result

2010


309

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Trend Options Feature

Description

Source Value

The initial value from which the trend begins.

Destination Range

A range of cells to which the results of the trend are written.

By Percentage

A specified percentage of the previous value (previous cell) in the destination range. To create an increasing trend, use a positive percentage. To create a declining trend, use a negative percentage.

By Value

A specified amount over the previous value (previous cell) in the destination range. To create an increasing trend, enter a positive value. To create a declining trend, enter a negative value.

Add to Existing Values

Select this checkbox to take the spread amount to each cell and add it to any existing values already in the destination range. If you leave it blank, the amount spread to each cell overwrites the amounts in the destination cells.

The Weighted modeling option lets you allocate a set of values by weighted factors in your spreadsheet. It allows you to take a set of values, grow them if desired, and then allocate the new amount based on the relative weights of the selected cells. The destination range is the same as the weight range. For example, you can weigh 12 months of revenue based on 12 months of cost of sales. In the example below, we are using base values for Jan, Feb, and Mar and we are applying the 'Weight' function to supplement the existing values.

310


2010

BPC430


Figure 401: Planning: Weight - Add a value of 3 to the existing values

Weight Options Feature

Description

Sum to Allocate

The initial sum from which the allocation begins. This amount defaults to the sum of the selected cells.

Weighted Destination

A range of cells that contain relative weights, to which the results of the allocation are written.

By Percentage

Increase of the overall sum to allocate by the specified percentage before allocating.

By Value

Increase of the overall sum to allocate by the specified value before allocating.

Each of the values should be increased by 1 each.

2010


311

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 402: Planning: Weight - Add 3 results

Comments Comments provide a vehicle for submitting, storing, and retrieving text commentary associated with Planning and Consolidation data cells. This allows users to annotate data so other users can view supporting information associated with a particular data point. The Comments function is fully integrated in Interface for Excel, Interface for Word, Interface for PowerPoint, and Interface for the Web. Therefore, you can enter and view comments from within any interface that manages data. • •

The action pane: 'Add new comment'. The Excel Interface: via the EVCOM function.

The comment feature must be turned on at the Application level for both methods.

Figure 403: Planning: Web comment parameter

312


2010

BPC430


Let's talk about the action pane option first. From the Interface for Excel for example, goto Data Input, open a dynamic template and you will see an option to 'Add new comment'.

Figure 404: Planning: Submitting Comments via the action pane

Figure 405: Planning: Submitting Comments via the Action Pane

2010


313

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 406: Planning: Meta Data Included with Comments created via Action Pane

By selecting a dimension, the system will assign that dimension's member to the comment, if not, a value of 'ALL' is assigned. Assigned dimension members can then be used to select the comments in the delivered reports. Priority and keywords can also be used as selection criteria.

314


2010

BPC430


Figure 407: Planning - comment action pane: step 1 and 2

Here's how you can view comments from the action pane. By not selecting a dimension, the system will not use that dimension's member as a selection criteria. 'Show comment history' prompts the system to display current and prior comments for a specific data intersection.

Figure 408: Planning: Action pane to view comments

2010


315

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 409: Planning: Action pane view comments step 3

The report below allows the user to see comments for the data intersection they select.

Figure 410: Planning: Action pane view result

316


2010

BPC430


Figure 411: Planning: Comment History

Now let's talk about how comments work in conjunction with the Excel Interface. This is what comments look like when they are collected in a separate column: Note: The comments below are not only stored in the workbook but also in the central comment table on the application server.

Figure 412: Planning: comment in column results

Comments are stored in a separate table from the transaction data on the BW Application Server. Comments generated from either the action pane option or EVCOM are all stored together.

2010


317

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 413: Planning: Submitting comments architecture

To submit comments from a cell in Excel, the EVCOM function must be used.

Figure 414: Planning: Column EVCOM function

318


2010

BPC430


When the use submits comments, the system provides a very specific message.

Figure 415: Planning: Column Comment Values & System Message

To use the excel popup feature for comments, you need to turn that on via the workbook options.

Figure 416: Planning: Cell comment workbook option

2010


319

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

You can store comments up to 256 characters long.

Figure 417: Planning: Cell comment and data

The third method is to create a comment but you can't see it at the same time in a Template or Schedule, so figures and comment are kept separately. Keywords are used to help users organize and search for comments in the database. When comments are submitted via EVCOM, the keyword is EVCOM! The active report or schedule cell returns comments associated with the active cell. The active current view returns comments associated with the active current view. The active current view is the combination of members displayed in Session Information: Current View and any locked members. Custom current view returns comments associated with a different current view than the active one. From the Comment for these CV values table, select the application. For each dimension, select the check box next to the dimensions for which you want to return comments for a specific member or for all members of the dimension. Leaving a check box unselected ignores the members for that dimension for this comment, and returns comments for any member of that dimension. In the What is the priority of the comment? field, select Critical, High, Medium, Low, or No Priority. When users report on comments, they are shown by in order of their priority level.

320


2010

BPC430


While viewing comments, you can update a comment or add more comments. Hint: Attention: When you view comments from the Action Pane, reporting on [ALL] members for all dimensions will not necessarily return all comments in the application. You can get all comments for that dimension by deselecting the dimension on step 1 of viewing comments. If you ignored some dimensions when you submitted the comments, you will also need to ignore those dimensions in the report context. SAP Business Planning and Consolidation will fill these dimensions with [ALL] dimension members. So when you view these comments, you will need to report on [ALL] dimension in the report context. In the “Do you want to include comment history” field, select the check box to show multiple comments for the specified search criteria. Leave unselected to return only the most recent comment that meets the criteria. After adding a comment or choosing your view options, you can display them in the comments summary page. If you just added a new comment, the summary page contains the newly added comment data region and the comment entry that was made to the database. If other comments exist for the same data region, those also appear in the summary page. Additionally, if associated data regions contain comments, those data regions also appear in the page. If you defined view options, all associated comments are displayed.

2010


321

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 418: Planning: Systems Report Overview

System Reports are pre-designed web reports, that allow you to report on system information/activity, rather than transaction/master data in the system. You can report on: • • • • •

Activity Audit Data Audit Security Comments Work Status

You can reach the comments reports as follows: • •

322

Interface for Excel Action Pane, click Open System Reports → Comments Report Interface for the Web Action Pane, click Launch System Reports → Comments Report.


2010

BPC430


Figure 419: Planning: Comments: Run web report

Figure 420: Planning: Comments: Web Report Result

When comments are submitted via the action pane without an dimension, the value “ALL” is stored in the comment tables.

2010


323

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 421: Example: Search Comments Based on Keywords

The User can search Comments based on Keywords. In SAP Business Planning and Consolidation the user can get Comment #1 by filtering with keyword “Hello”. The user will get both comments by filtering with keyword “wo”. When you view comments from the Action Pane, reporting on [ALL] members for all dimensions will not necessarily return all comments in the application. You can get all comments for that dimension by deselecting the dimension on step 1 of viewing comments. If you ignore some dimensions when you submitted the comments, you will also need to ignore those dimensions in the report context. SAP Business Planning and Consolidation will fill these dimensions with [ALL] dimension members. So when you view these comments, you will need to report on [ALL] dimension in the report context. When an application is modified so as to add a new dimension or remove an existing dimension, the applicability of existing comments becomes questionable and, therefore, the comments are deleted.

324


2010

BPC430


Figure 422: Planning: Where are Comments stored? 1/2

This slide and the next one show how you should proceed to see your comments in the comment database.

Figure 423: Planning: Where are Comments stored? 2/2

2010


325

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Distribution & Collection Wizard • •

Reports and input schedules are distributed through e-mail or a designated network folder. You can collect changes to offline input schedules and send the data to a database.

Figure 424: Planning: Distribution & Collection Wizard concept

1. 2. 3. 4.

Prepare an input schedule to be used as the 'template'. Create a distribution list that defines the scope (current view) of the data for one or more users. Use the Distribution Wizard to distribute offline reports or input schedules through e-mail or a network folder. Users can enter data offline, and then e-mail the reports back to you or save them in a designated directory. You can then use the Distribution Wizard to collect the data from the modified reports and send it to the database.

This feature allows you to distribute reports and input schedules to multiple recipients, based on a predefined distribution list. You can then collect multiple input schedules from users. Prerequisites: You have task security rights to distribute and collect data.

326


2010

BPC430


Note the following features when you distribute and collect input schedules: • • • •

Reports or input schedules are locked (parked). You can collect changes to offline input schedules and send the data to a database. Reports and input schedules are distributed through e-mail or a designated network folder. Activities: Distributing offline reports involves the following steps (with an optional step to collect modified input schedules): – –

Create a distribution list that defines the scope (current view) of the data for one or more users. Use the Distribution Wizard to distribute offline reports or input schedules through e-mail or a network folder. The system creates reports for each user and for each current view described by the distribution report.

– –

(Optional) If you distribute input schedules, users can enter data offline, and then e-mail the reports back to you or save them in a designated directory. You can then use the Distribution Wizard to collect the data from the modified reports and send it to the database.

Figure 425: Distribution and Collection Overview

2010


327

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Access and execution for Distributor and Collector happens via the client. You can access it via the Excel menu. All reports will be executed based on the authorization of the user executing the Wizard.

Figure 426: Distribution Lists

Again, access to create Distribution Lists happens via the client side ePublish menu. The following shows you how to create a new Distribution List and the path to open the standard, delivered templates://WebFolder/AppSet/Application/eExcel/Pdbooks/Distribution_template.xlt

328


2010

BPC430


Figure 427: Default Distribution List

In the fixed key section, you should include all of your dimensions except those that are variable. That way, the wizard will not randomly use dimension members for those not specified.

Figure 428: Wizard: distribution list - fixed keys

The vari keys control the 'bursting' of the templates. You can use parent members here.

2010


329

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 429: Wizard: distribution list of the vari keys

This is the delivered Distribution Template (in ApShell). At the highest level in the Distribution template, you enter the overall Book name and then each Section Name. In this example slide, the first section will distribute an Input Schedule, and the second section will distribute a Report. For each section report/schedule name, filters and varykeys need to be specified. Please remember, the varykey named in each section will specify what dimensions to burst on, and who should receive each generated report.

Figure 430: Distribution Template Fields

330


2010

BPC430


A Distribution Template may contain the following fields: • • • •

BOOK: the title of your distributed book. SECTION: denotes the beginning of a section. REPNAME: report filename, location and title (can also be for Input Schedules). FIXKEY: sets dimension members to the fixed values when generating the report –

•

For example, you can ensure that a report runs for 2008.TOTAL and ACTUAL. VARYKEYS: lists the dimensions and dimension members that should vary for each report that will get created. – –

For example, if you want to create a new offline report for each Entity/Cost Center/etc, you would specify that dimension as a Vary Key. You then map a specific Vary Key to a User ID who should receive that report (for example, the Cost Center manager). This way, each user who gets a report has the required dimension(s) set to their individual values Note: If you wish to distribute by email, make sure an email address has been maintained for each user.

•

SECTIONEND: denotes the end of a section.

Figure 431: Validating the Distribution Template

As mentioned in an earlier slide, you need to Validate the Distribution template. Please be very careful when creating the distribution template since Validation does not check for case sensitivity or valid members on the FIXKEY or VARKEY members. Even though you can launch the Validate from the menu directly, you will also be prompted to Validate before saving (although it is not mandatory to do so).

2010


331

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 432: Dimensions in the Distribution Template

Please remember a VARYKEY lists the dimensions and dimension members that should vary for each report that will get created. For example, if you want to create a new offline report for each Entity/Cost Center/etc, you would specify that dimension as a Vary Key. You then map a specific Vary Key to a User ID who should receive that report (for example, the Cost Center manager). This way, each user who gets a report has the required dimension(s) set to their individual values.

332


2010

BPC430


Figure 433: Offline Distribution Wizard

Note: In order to use the Wizard, you will need to change an Excel security setting: “Trust access to VBA project model”. By allowing this access, macros in any documents that you open can access the core Visual Basic objects, methods, and properties. When executing the Wizard, it will technically open the reports/input schedules on the client machine, change the current view, refresh, and then save offline. Also, please remember to change the Excel security setting and that the change in the security setting will only apply to the length of your Excel session. You have the ability to customize and control the email for Subject line, body, request send confirmation and zip the attachments. A Distribution Summary will be provided detailing the Application Set, Application, Book Name, Mode and Mail account setup.

2010


333

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 434: Wizard Distribution folder

Figure 435: Wizard: select distribution list

334


2010

BPC430


Figure 436: Wizard - distribute

The second Distribution option “Lockdown and Save to folder” is very similar to the previous (Lockdown and Send mail) slide. By selecting the “Lockdown and Save to folder” option, you have the ability to select a target folder for the report or schedule distribution. The Target folder can be on any client PC or accessible drive or location.

2010


335

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 437: Viewing the Output from Folder Distribution

This slide shows how to view the Distribution output from a folder location. You can see from the slide that the files are listed by recipient user ID, VARYKEY values and then report name. On the first line in the example, the username is User123, the VARYKEY value is ESALESUS and the report name is Ryan Test3.xls. When the users opens the report to view, there is no need for them to have the SAP Business Planning and Consolidation client. Even though technically, there are still EV functions in this spreadsheet, the user can view the spreadsheet without the SAP Business Planning and Consolidation client.

336


2010

BPC430


Figure 438: Wizard: Collection

Figure 439: Wizard: Collected

Below is an example of viewing the data that was collected automatically.

2010


337

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 440: Wizard: Result

From the task menu, select Collection instead of Distribution. Two options exist as to the method of data collection. You can select from email or choose a folder path. In this example, “Local Folder” is selected for the folder path. All the files available from that location are displayed. You have the ability to select one, several or choose the “Select All” check box to process all identified file(s). The Review Distribution Summary window displays information about your request, including Estimated Pages and Time, Application set name, Application name and the selected template(s).

Figure 441: Security

338


2010

BPC430


You need to ensure users have the correct tasks identified in order to be able to execute the necessary Distribution and Collection processes. To secure these processes, simply restrict access to the appropriate task. To ensure there are no authorization errors, you need to make sure the Member Access Profile is sufficient (especially with respect to the dynamic VaryKeys). It is important to note that security does not control the generated workbooks. Since they are offline, anyone who has access to the workbooks, can open and view the data in the workbooks.

Figure 442: Technical Considerations

In order to distribute reports via email, you need to set up the SAP Business Planning and Consolidation WebAdmin parameters listed above.

2010


339

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Member Validation

Figure 443: Characteristic Validations Overview

Note: You as a customer will define and configure filters on invalid combinations. If the system tries to save data for an invalid combination this error message will appear: 'Member Third_Party is not valid for dimension InterCo in rule 0000002.' This is only available in the NetWeaver release.

Figure 444: Characteristic Validation - Driver Dimension

Figure 445: UJ Validation Options

340


2010

BPC430


Figure 446: Assign Driver Dimension

Figure 447: Create Validation Rule

2010


341

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 448: Turning Validations On

The rules are created at the “Dimension” level, not at the application level. That’s why in this example, the rule is created against the Account dimension. Therefore, the same set of rules can be used in multiple applications.

Figure 449: Characteristic Validation - Summary

SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 7.0, version for SAP NetWeaver provides a new “Validation” engine that can optionally be implemented, to allow a “functional” definition of what is a valid or invalid record. This feature is much more used for Consolidation than for Planning. For example, being able to specify that a Trading Partner must be populated if you are trying to post an Intercompany Account. Records that dont meet a validation rule will be rejected, indicating which validation rule was not passed. Validation occurs automatically during the write back process. But you can do Validation checks before send data.

342


2010

BPC430


Each record is checked against established business rules during the data send. Validations configuration is performed in transaction UJ_VALIDATION. It operates with the concept of a driver dimension, where 1 driver dimension must be specified for each Application. You can create “Rules” for each Driver dimension. All records being saved are validated against these rules. Rules can be defined either through the Rule table, or complex rules can be implemented as BAdIs. Rules and Members are a N:N relationship (1 rule can be assigned to multiple members, and 1 member can be assigned to multiple rules). A record will be checked against all matching rules and must pass all of them to be valid. You can turn validations on or off by application.

2010


343

Unit 4: Planning

344

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Exercise 8: Allocation Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Demonstrate the setup of an allocation using script logic. • Utilize an input schedule to enter data values and validate the allocation results in your application set.

Business Example You are performing a planning task and you need to assign values to lower level operating units. This will typically be done for expense but can be carried out for Revenue or even Balance Sheet items since it is freely definable by you.

Task 1: Single Sender Allocation Set up and execute an allocation. 1.

Use the provided allocation logic in your BPC430_## folder in your Planning Application to do a simple expense allocation based on labor hours. Also, you will need to reference the allocation file in the default logic file so that it will be executed on the fly as data is input.

2.

In the Planning Application, open the Nested Row Input Schedule in the Interface for Excel, input 50,000 EUR for C9000 in the 'Social Contributions' for period 2007.Jan and when you save it the default logic should run the allocation. The assignment will be based on you inputting 400 hours for C1000 and 300 in C2000. Save the revised input schedule as 'Allocation' on the company folder.

Result


2010


345

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 450: Allocation Result

In cell P51, the Social Contributions for PC4YOU Deutschland Gmbh should calculate to 400/700 times 50,000 = 28,571. In cell P72, the Social Contributions for PC4YOU UK Ltd. should calculate to 300/700 times 50,000 =21,429. Enter zero for all values and send.

Task 2: Summary Allocation Input values for multiple accounts but only use one account to send the values. 1.

Set up and execute a summary allocation using the provided file in your BPC430-## folder.

Task 3: Detail Allocation Input values for multiple accounts and use the same accounts to send the values. 1.

346

Set up and execute a detailed allocation using the provided file in your BPC430-## folder.


2010

BPC430


Solution 8: Allocation Task 1: Single Sender Allocation Set up and execute an allocation. 1.

Use the provided allocation logic in your BPC430_## folder in your Planning Application to do a simple expense allocation based on labor hours. Also, you will need to reference the allocation file in the default logic file so that it will be executed on the fly as data is input. a)

In your remote desktop copy the provided code: Start → Documents → My documents → Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Open the allocation file → Ctrl-C the code.

b)

Go to the Admin Console: In the Planning Application → Script Logic → Allocation → Paste in the code → Validate and Save. This is what the logic above is going to do: The logic below will allocate the total amount posted to the CE0004030 account using the relative values in the CE0652000 account for the two 'receivers' in the CG1 group. The other members by dimension are: 'Actual' category, 'None' activity, 'Manual' datasrc, and 'EUR' Rptcurrency.

Figure 451: Allocation Script Logic


2010


347

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

c)

2.

In this scenario, we want the allocation logic to run whenever data is input, so we need to reference it in the default logic. Therefore → Goto the admin console → Planning application → Default.lgf → reference the allocation logic by inputting: → *INCLUDE ALLOCATION.LGF → Validate and Save → Ok. Note: If the Default.LGF file does not exit, create it.

In the Planning Application, open the Nested Row Input Schedule in the Interface for Excel, input 50,000 EUR for C9000 in the 'Social Contributions' for period 2007.Jan and when you save it the default logic should run the allocation. The assignment will be based on you inputting 400 hours for C1000 and 300 in C2000. Save the revised input schedule as 'Allocation' on the company folder. a)

b)

Go to the Interface for Excel: Expand the current view → Use the Application drop down → Select Planning. Set your current view as follows: Application

Planning

Category

Actual

Entity

CG2

P_Acct

CE0001000 (parent)

P_Activity

None

P_DataSrc

Manual

RptCurrency

EUR

Time

2007.Total

Measures

Periodic

Select Home → Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Nested Row → Ok → Planning & Consolidation → eTools → Workbook Options → De select the 'Expand on Current View Change' (so you can change several current view members before you have to expand) → Ok. Click on the Group icon '+' above column J → Enter C9000,C1000,C2000 for the Entity memberset → Enter CE0004030,CE0652000 for the P_ACCT memberset → Delete ',HideRowKeys' in C56 (leave 'hide column keys')→ Expand All → Select Ok to clear input data (if necessary)→ Hide column M → Close the column group.


348


2010

BPC430


Save via eTools → Save Dynamic Template → Company Folder → Allocation → Save. c)

d)

Enter the following data: Cell

Value 2007.Jan

Entity

Account

P49

50,000 Eur

C9000

Social Contributions (CE0004030)

P52

400 hrs

C1000

Labour Hours (CE0652000)

P54

300 hrs

C2000

Labour Hours (CE0652000)

In the action pane → Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close confirmation. Caution: If you receive a message that an error occurred while communicating with the web server, go check your code in the Admin Console and try it again. Make sure the dimensions in the allocation logic match those in your planning application.

Result


2010


349

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 452: Allocation Result

In cell P51, the Social Contributions for PC4YOU Deutschland Gmbh should calculate to 400/700 times 50,000 = 28,571. In cell P72, the Social Contributions for PC4YOU UK Ltd. should calculate to 300/700 times 50,000 =21,429. Enter zero for all values and send.

Task 2: Summary Allocation Input values for multiple accounts but only use one account to send the values. 1.

Set up and execute a summary allocation using the provided file in your BPC430-## folder. a)

In the admin console: Select the Planning application → Script logic → Create new logic → Enter: SUMMARY → Ok.

b)

Goto the provided file on the C drive: Start → Documents → My documents → Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430-## → Open the summary_allocation file → Ctrl-C the code.

c)

In the admin console: Paste the code into the SUMMARY file → Validate and save → Ok. Continued on next page

350


2010

BPC430


d)

Select the Default.lgf → Change it to: *INCLUDE SUMMARY.LGF → Validate and Save → Ok.

e)

In the Interface for Excel: In your allocation input tempate → open the control panel → Set your P_Acct memberset to: CE0004010.CE0004020,CE0004030,CE0004820,CE0652000 → Expand all

f)

Enter the following values:

g)

Entity

Account

Amount

C9000

CE0004010

100

C9000

CE0004020

200

C9000

CE0004030

300

C1000

CE0652000

2

C2000

CE0652000

8

Send data → Send active worksheet:

Figure 453: Summary allocation


2010


351

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Enter zero for all the 4000 accounts and send it.

Task 3: Detail Allocation Input values for multiple accounts and use the same accounts to send the values. 1.

Set up and execute a detailed allocation using the provided file in your BPC430-## folder. a)

In the admin console: Select the Planning application → Script logic → Create new logic → Enter: DETAIL → Ok.

b)

Goto the provided file on the C drive: Start → Documents → My documents → Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430-## → Open the detail_allocation file → Ctrl-C the code.

c)

In the admin console: Paste the code into the DETAIL file → Validate and save → Ok.

d)

Select the Default.lgf → Change it to: *INCLUDE DETAIL.LGF → Validate and Save → Ok.

e)

In your revised allocation template: Enter the following values:

f)

Entity

Account

Amount

C9000

CE0004010

100

C9000

CE0004020

200

C9000

CE0004030

300

Send data → Send active worksheet:


352


2010

BPC430


Figure 454: Detail allocation

2010


353

Unit 4: Planning

354

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Exercise 9: Spread Trend Weight Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the delivered spread trend and weight workbook options to perform manual planning.

Business Example Planners will occasionally have a need to easily manipulate their data in excel. The spread trend and weight modeling options are built in functions that you can use without any configuration or programming.

Task 1: Spread Use the 'spread' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using a base value of 100 in January, use the spread option to perform an equal distribution of values into January, February, and March. Then use the 'spread' option in conjunction with weights and reference data. This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application.

Result This is an example of a feature that almost any planner could use, and no programming is required.

Task 2: Trend Use the 'trend' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using a base value of 100 in January, use the trend function to distribute the values for Jan, Feb, and Mar by using the % and value feature in both overwrite and add mode. This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application.

Task 3: Weight Use the 'Weight' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using the base values for Jan, Feb, and Mar, use the 'Weight' function to supplement the existing values. Continued on next page

2010


355

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application.

Task 4: Use spread trend and weight together Use all three functions without the step by step instructions to develop the following result set:

Figure 455: Using spread, trend, and weight

1.

356

Starting with a value of 2000, use the 3 functions to derive the data set above.


2010

BPC430


Solution 9: Spread Trend Weight Task 1: Spread Use the 'spread' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using a base value of 100 in January, use the spread option to perform an equal distribution of values into January, February, and March. Then use the 'spread' option in conjunction with weights and reference data. This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application. a)

In the Interface for Excel, set your current view as follows: Expand your current view → Use the dimension hypertext to select the values below: (do not type in the members)

Figure 456: Spread - Current View

b)

To prepare for our testing, let's open up a delivered input schedule and input a figure to spread: Select 'Data Input' → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account - trend → Ok → Enter 100 in K49 → Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close → You have now inserted a record into the SALES Application.


2010


357

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 457: Spread - Initial Value

c)

Use the 'spread' function to equally distribute the 100 to the same account into the 1st three periods: If 'Spread' does not appear, select back → Select 'spread' on the right in your action pane → Use your mouse to make the following selections: Note: This option will overwrite any existing values unless you choose 'Add to existing values'. Also note that we are overwriting the source value in this case. We will use weights next.

Figure 458: Spread - Equal


358


2010

BPC430


d)

Did you receive these results? Select ok → Compare your results with the picture below:

Figure 459: Spread - Equal Result

e)

In this next scenario, we want to spread the initial amount to the months using distribution keys to achieve the seasonality that we want. Clear your unsaved data: Select refresh workbook → If you are prompted to clear existing input data → Yes.

f)

Insert a row for our distribution factors: Right click on row 42 → Insert → Increase the width of row 42 to match row 43 → Select 'Expand All' → Answer 'ok' to clear any existing data and also to perform the EVDRE expansion.

g)

Add a list of distribution factors for the first 3 months (the intent here is to convey concepts so we will not do all 12 months for the sake of time): In K42 → Enter 'Jan Key' → Right justify it → Left click in K43 → Select ”Data' → Select Data Validation' as shown below

Figure 460: Spread - Validation Option

h)

Enter seasonality factors as show below: Data Validation → Allow 'List' → Enter the 'Source' values: 1,2,3,4,5 (in this example): Continued on next page

2010


359

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 461: Spread - Input distribution keys (omit the ',' after 5)

i)

Select OK → Copy K42:43 to L and M → Also select via the drop downs the values as shown:

Figure 462: Spread - Distribution key set up result

j)

Test out your seasonality factors by using the 'spread' function's Back arrow if necessary → Select 'Spread' → Make the following selections via your mouse:


360


2010

BPC430


Figure 463: Spread - Distribution selections

k)

Did you receive the same results as below? Ok → Compare your results:

Figure 464: Spread - Distribution result

l)

In this next example of how to use the 'spread' feature, we will distribute the initial value according to existing reference data that you will input manually: Select 'Refresh workbook' → Clear values → Input the following values:


2010


361

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 465: Spread - Reference data: Initial

m)

Select 'Spread' → Make the following selections:

Figure 466: Spread - Reference data selections

n)

Select OK → Did you receive the following? Note: In this case, we did not overwrite the reference data but we could have. You can use this technique when you want to seasonalize data 'just like account xyz' for example. Continued on next page

362


2010

BPC430


Figure 467: Spread - Reference data results

Result This is an example of a feature that almost any planner could use, and no programming is required.

Task 2: Trend Use the 'trend' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using a base value of 100 in January, use the trend function to distribute the values for Jan, Feb, and Mar by using the % and value feature in both overwrite and add mode. This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application. a)

Clear all data except for the 100 initial value.

b)

Use the trend function for the 'OEM' budget for Jan - Mar in overwrite mode: Select Trend → use the 100 as a source → Select OEM Jan-Mar as the destination→ use a 'value' of 20 → Ok → Did you get 120, 140, 160?

c)

Use the trend function for the 'OEM' budget for Jan - Mar in add mode: Select Trend → use the 100 as a source → Select OEM Jan-Mar as the destination again → use a 'value' of 20 → Check 'Add to existing values' → Ok → Did you get 240, 280, 320?

d)

Clear your existing unsaved data: Refresh workbook → 'Yes' to clear existing input data.(if prompted)

e)

Make your 'trend' selections: Select 'trend' → Make your selections as shown below:


2010


363

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 468: Trend - 5% Selections

f)

Does your result look like this: (leave the data there for the next task)

Figure 469: Trend - 5% Result

Task 3: Weight Use the 'Weight' modeling option to generate your planning dataset. 1.

Using the base values for Jan, Feb, and Mar, use the 'Weight' function to supplement the existing values. Continued on next page

364


2010

BPC430


This lab is performed in your BPC430_## Appset in the SALES Application. a)

Add a value of '3' to the three existing values: Select 'Weight' → Make your selections as you see below for the 'weighted destination': Note: The sum to allocate value is system generated.

Figure 470: Weight - Add a value of 3 to the existing values

b)

Select OK → Each of the values should be increased by 1 each.

Figure 471: Weight - Add 3 results


2010


365

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Task 4: Use spread trend and weight together Use all three functions without the step by step instructions to develop the following result set:

Figure 472: Using spread, trend, and weight

1.

366

Starting with a value of 2000, use the 3 functions to derive the data set above. a)

Clear the temporary data: Refresh workbook → clear data if prompted.

b)

Use the 'spread' function for Maintenance supplies with distribution keys as weights.

c)

Use the 'trend' function for OEM with a 3% increase.

d)

Copy OEM and then use the 'weight' function for Indirect Labor to add an overall value of 50.

e)

eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Input Schedules → Spread Trend Weight → Save.


2010

BPC430


Exercise 10: Comments Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Enter comments into the system by using the Excel interface action pane. • Enter comments into a separate column by using the EVCOM function. • Enter comments into a data cell with the EVCOM function and 'Excel Popup' turned on. • View comments from the action pane and web report.

Business Example As business users input planning data, they would like to record a brief commentary to capture their assumptions.

Task 1: Action pane comments Use the Interface for Excel action pane to enter and view comments. 1.

We'll need to turn on the web parameter to enable comments for our SALES Application first. Then, in the Interface for Excel, we will use the action pane to enter and view comments. Use your BPC430_## Appset.

2.

Now let's go back to the Excel Interface and work with the commenting features.

3.

Let's run the 'View comment' report to see all of our comments.

Task 2: Comment Column Use the EVCOM function to record comments. 1.

Now let's set up the account trend input schedule to write and view comments in a separate column.

Task 3: Comments in data cell Use the EVCOM function to enter and view comments in a data cell. 1. 2.

2010

Set up the entity trend input schedule to accept cell based comments. Let's view all of our comments via the action pane and the web comment report.


367

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Solution 10: Comments Task 1: Action pane comments Use the Interface for Excel action pane to enter and view comments. 1.

We'll need to turn on the web parameter to enable comments for our SALES Application first. Then, in the Interface for Excel, we will use the action pane to enter and view comments. Use your BPC430_## Appset. a)

Enable comments for your SALES Application: From the Admin console → Select available interfaces → Interface for the web → Available interfaces → Administration → Set Application Parameters → Does your action pane look like this?

Figure 473: Web Action Pane

b)

Enable comments: Confirm the value of 'ON' for the 'COMMENT' parameter:


368


2010

BPC430


Figure 474: Web parameter

2.

Now let's go back to the Excel Interface and work with the commenting features. a)

Goto the Interface for Excel for the BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application.

b)

Set your current view:


2010


369

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 475: Action Pane Lab current view

c)

Open the account trend input schedule: Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Ok:

Figure 476: Initial account trend template


370


2010

BPC430


d)

Use the action pane to add a comment independent of the input schedule (we'll use that in a moment): On the lower right → 'Add new comment' → Select 'Custom current view' → Make your selections as shown below: Note: This comment will be stored on the BW application server in a table separate from the Application. It will record, the user, time, comment as well as the assignment of the dimension members you make.

Figure 477: Action pane 1st comment

e)

Continue → You should receive a message that your comment was recorded.

f)

Record a second comment: 'Add new comment' → Select 'Custom current view' → Make your selections as shown below → Continue to record the text.


2010


371

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 478: Action pane 2nd comment

3.

Let's run the 'View comment' report to see all of our comments. a)

In Excel → On the lower left → Select 'View comments' → Select 'Custom current view' → Enter your parameters as shown for step 2 and 3: Note: By not selecting specific dimension members, we are fetching all comments in the comment table. Also, by selecting 'Show comment history', we are selecting all comments for a given data intersection (the latest as well as prior).


372


2010

BPC430


Figure 479: Action pane view 2/3

b)

Select continue → Make your selections as shown:

Figure 480: Action pane view 3

c)

Do your results look like these? Continued on next page

2010


373

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 481: Action pane view result

Task 2: Comment Column Use the EVCOM function to record comments. 1.

Now let's set up the account trend input schedule to write and view comments in a separate column. a)

We'll need to access the row and column keys in our EVCOM formula, so turn them on: In Excel → Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account trend → Open up the column group with the '+' → Delete the hide row and column keyword in C56 → Expand all → Clear data if prompted.

b)

We will not need to expand this schedule anymore, so let's turn off expansion. This will also prevent the system from overwriting our new comment columns: In B49 → Delete the cell range from the EVDRE formula:


374


2010

BPC430


Figure 482: Column comment, turn expansion off

c)

Insert 3 columns for Jan, Feb, and Mar and label them as 'Jan Com' etc:

Figure 483: Columns for comments

d)

Insert the EVCOM formula in R49: In R49 → Insert Formula → Select category Planning and Consolidation if necessary → EVCOM → Ok → Use your mouse and F4 key (to lock rows and cols) to make the following selections:


2010


375

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 484: Column EVCOM in R49

e)

Select Ok → Copy the formula to R50:52 and T49:52 and V49:52

f)

Input the data and comments as shown below → Send data → Send active worksheet:

Figure 485: Column Com Values & Sys Message


376


2010

BPC430


g)

Select Yes → You'll receive an acknowledgement:

Figure 486: Column comment acknowledgement

h)

Continue to see your final results: (Expand all if necessary)

Figure 487: Column results

i)

Change the data and comments: Change the 125 to 135 → Change the % from 2 to 2.5 → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close → Expand all:


2010


377

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 488: Change data and comment (before and after the send)

j)

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Input schedule → 'Column Comments' → Save.

Task 3: Comments in data cell Use the EVCOM function to enter and view comments in a data cell. 1.

Set up the entity trend input schedule to accept cell based comments. a)

Set your current view as follows:


378


2010

BPC430


Figure 489: Cell comments CV

b)

Select home → Data input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Entity Trend → Ok

Figure 490: Cell comments initial report


2010


379

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

c)

Open up the column group → Delete the display row and col keywords in C56 → Expand all → Clear input data.

d)

Turn on the Excel popup feature: eTools → Workbook options → Select the radio button as shown below:

Figure 491: Cell comment workbook option

e)

Format the input area to interpret the text: Highlight K49:M54 → Right click → Format cells → Make it a text format:


380


2010

BPC430


Figure 492: Cell comment format

f)

In O49 → Insert formula → EVCOM → Configure as follows:

Figure 493: Cell comment in O49

g)

Confirm the dialog box and copy your formula: Select Ok → Copy the formula into O49:Q55.


2010


381

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

h)

Enter a comment and value of 155 in K50: Right click in K50 → Insert comment:

Figure 494: Cell comment and data

i)

Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close → You should have a comment indicator in the upper right of the cell (Expand all if necessary) Note: Your comment from the prior task will appear for STORE1, as it should, since it was recorded against the same data intersection.

Figure 495: Cell comment result

2.

Let's view all of our comments via the action pane and the web comment report. Continued on next page

382


2010

BPC430


a)

Back arrow → View comments on lower right → Custom current view → Deselect all dimensions → Continue → Show comment history → Continue → Continue:

Figure 496: Comments: View all results (yours may vary from the one above)

b)

Now let's run the web report: In Excel → Home → Open system reports → Comments report → Select 'History':

Figure 497: Comments: Run web report

c)

Continue to see your report:


2010


383

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 498: Comments: Web Report Result

d)

384

In Excel, Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Input schedule → 'Column in Cells' → Save.


2010

BPC430


Exercise 11: The Offline Distribution Wizard Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and save an input schedule to be distributed. • Create a new distribution list. • Distribute and then collect the data using the wizard.

Business Example You have some users who have not been trained to use BPC for example, and they will therefore work offline. After they have updated their excel templates and saved them to an offline directory, use the wizard to collect the data into the SALES application.

Task 1: Create the Input Schedule Prepare the Account Trend input schedule for use as the 'template' to be distributed for Store 5 and Store 7. Use the BPC430_## Appset and the SALES Application. 1.

The distribution wizard requires a template to be used as a standardized input form to collect the data. Goto the 'Interface for Excel' to do the work. Note: The set up is similar for using the distribution wizard to push out reports to a file share or to Outlook.

Task 2: Set up the Distribution List Create the distribution list for Store 5 and 7 by setting up Entity as a 'VARI' key. Make the remaining dimensions 'FIXED' keys. We'll only need one 'section' in this case. 1.

Name the components of your distribution list as the STUDENT BOOK, SECTION 1, REPORT 1, and reference your STUDENT_SCHEDULE.XLT file.

Task 3: Run the Distribution Wizard Distributing the Schedules 1.

Distribute the schedules to an offline folder to make them available to the planning users.


2010


385

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Task 4: Run the Collection Wizard Enter your data offline, then collect the data and run a report to confirm the results. 1.

386

Open the files and input your data offline.


2010

BPC430


Solution 11: The Offline Distribution Wizard Task 1: Create the Input Schedule Prepare the Account Trend input schedule for use as the 'template' to be distributed for Store 5 and Store 7. Use the BPC430_## Appset and the SALES Application. 1.

The distribution wizard requires a template to be used as a standardized input form to collect the data. Goto the 'Interface for Excel' to do the work. Note: The set up is similar for using the distribution wizard to push out reports to a file share or to Outlook. a)

Set your current view and create and save an input schedule to be used as the standard input template. Open up your current view → Use the dimension name hypertext to make the selections as shown:

Figure 499: Template Current View

We want to distribute and collect data for Store 5 and 7, confirm that they belong to the CONEUROPE Group: In the current view → Select the Entity dimension hypertext and open the CONEUROPE group as shown below:


2010


387

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 500: ConEurope Members

b)

Open the Account Trend template and modify it to include Entity in the rows: Close the Entity selection screen → Select Home → Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Ok → Open the column group to see the 'Control Panel' → Unhide any hidden rows if necessary → Make your selections as shown below:

Figure 501: Control Panel - Student Schedule

c)

Execute your new settings: Close the control panel → Expand all → Clear any existing data → This is the 'input form' everyone will use to submit their offline data: Continued on next page

388


2010

BPC430


Figure 502: Student Schedule

d)

Save your template in the input schedule folder: Select eTools → Save dynamic template → Company → Input Schedules → 'STUDENT_SCHEDULE' → Save → Close the workbook.

Task 2: Set up the Distribution List Create the distribution list for Store 5 and 7 by setting up Entity as a 'VARI' key. Make the remaining dimensions 'FIXED' keys. We'll only need one 'section' in this case. 1.

Name the components of your distribution list as the STUDENT BOOK, SECTION 1, REPORT 1, and reference your STUDENT_SCHEDULE.XLT file. a)

From the ePublish menu: Select manage distribution list → New → In B3 enter STUDENT BOOK → In B6 enter: SECTION 1 → In C8 enter: REPORT 1 → In D8 enter: STUDENT_SCHEDULE.XLT

b)

Copy cells C11-13 → Paste special to the same cells→ Values Note: To hard code the members and prevent the system from randomly using the executing user's current view during the distribution. In general, it is a good idea to account for every dimension in the application in either the VARI or FIXED keys.

c)

Add a fixed key for the account dimension: Copy line 13 into line 14 → Replace R with A in the B14 formula→Enter CE0004010 in C14 → Enter STORE5 IN A19 → Enter STORE7 in A20.


2010


389

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 503: Distribution List Fixed Keys

d)

Add a fixed key for Product: Copy row 14 to row 15 → Enter PRODUCT in B15 → Enter DOGBALL in C15.

e)

Set up your VARI keys: In B19 and B20 enter: ADTWDFVM2001\CPM-## Note: There is only one user in this case, however the system will generate two files, one for each store. Also, the domain is entered before the user id. ()

f)

Delete the rows for additional sections that we will not need: Delete rows 27 through 45.

Figure 504: Vari Keys (your stores will be in row 19 & 20)


390


2010

BPC430


g)

Save the STUDENT DIST: Goto ePublish → Manage Distribution List → Save As → When prompted to validate the list → Respond 'Yes' → OK → Enter a name: STUDENT_DIST → in the PDBooks folder (the system will save it as an XLS file by default) → Close the file. Note: If you receive an error, check the name and location of the Student Schedule.

Figure 505: Save Student Dist

Task 3: Run the Distribution Wizard Distributing the Schedules 1.

Distribute the schedules to an offline folder to make them available to the planning users. a)

Select 'Planning & Consolidation', and then from the ePublish menu: Select offline distribution wizard → Confirm that the task is set to 'Distribution' → Select 'Lock and Save to folder':


2010


391

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 506: Lockdown and Save

b)

Distribute the files immediately and assign to an offline folder location: Select 'Distribute Now' → Select 'STUDENT_DIST' → Select your 'folder for saving lockdowned workbook' as follows:


392


2010

BPC430


Figure 507: Dist Folder

c)

Confirm that your distribution list is selected and you file location is set: Select Next→ Your 'Select Distribution List' screen should look like this:

Figure 508: Select Dist List


2010


393

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

d)

Carry out the distribution: Select Next → Confirm that SECTION 1 is selected → Next → 'Process' → Ok:

Figure 509: Distribute

e)

Complete the process and exit excel: Select 'Finish' → Exit the Excel Interface.

Task 4: Run the Collection Wizard Enter your data offline, then collect the data and run a report to confirm the results. 1.

Open the files and input your data offline. a)

Access the two files from your remote desktop: In your remote desktop → Goto the Start menu → Documents → My documents → PC_NW → ADTWDFVM2001 → CPM-## → AppInfo → BPC430_## → PD Files → LOADEDBOX


394


2010

BPC430


Figure 510: Open the offline files

b)

Enter your data for Store 5: Double click the first file → Enter 555 for Jan for Store5 → Save. Enter your data for Store 7: Double click the second file → Enter 777 for Jan for Store7 → Save → Close Excel.

c)

Use the data collection feature to load data from the remote schedules into the database using a batch process: Log onto the Excel Interface → Set your current view as follows: Application

SALES

Category

FLASH

Entity

CONEUROPE

Product

DOGBALL

P_Acct

CE0004010

RptCurrency

LC

Time

2009.TOTAL

Measures

PERIODIC


2010


395

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

d)

Access the collection wizard: Goto 'Planning & Consolidation' → ePublish → Offline distribution wizard → Collection:

Figure 511: Collection

e)

Select 'Collect Now' → Local Folder → Working Folder: My documents → PC_NW → ADTWDFVM2001 → CPM-## → AppInfo → BPC430_## → PD Files → LOADEDBOX → Ok → Select both files:


396


2010

BPC430


Figure 512: Select Input Schedules

f)

Upload the data: Next → Process → Ok:

Figure 513: Collected


2010


397

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

g)

Was data 'accepted'? → 'Finish'.

h)

Now let's view the data: Select Home → Reporting & Analysis → Build a report using a dynamic template → Subtotals by Account → Open →Ok → Open the column group → Unhide any hidden rows → Make your control panel settings as shown below:

Figure 514: Control Panel: Report Template

i)

Execute your new settings: Expand all → 'Life is Good'!:

Figure 515: Collection Result

j)

398

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Reports→ 'STUDENT DIST REPORT' → Save.


2010

BPC430


Exercise 12: Member validation Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Apply combination checking for an application.

Business Example You want to prevent invalid combinations of characteristics in your planning data. In the situation below, we need to prevent a particular expense account posting to one specific entity.

Task: You will set up characteristic validation for a 'driver' dimension in your SALES Application so that invalid combinations will not be allowed. Then you will demonstrate the system error when you try to enter values that are not allowed based on your settings. Note: The 'Driver' dimension is the one dimension per application whose members are used to compare against other dimension members to see if they are permissible. There is only one driver dimension per application but it can be used as a point of comparison with any other dimension in the application.

2010

1.

Log on to the BW Server and in the UJ_Validation transaction code assign P_Acct as the 'Driver Dimension' for the SALES.

2.

Set up the rule maintenance for the P_Acct CE0004830 'consulting costs' account so that if a record is posted against entity STORE1 it will fail.

3.

Activate the rule for Manual data entry for the SALES.

4.

Go to the Interface for Excel in the SALES application and use the account trend input template to test out your new configuration.


399

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Solution 12: Member validation Task: You will set up characteristic validation for a 'driver' dimension in your SALES Application so that invalid combinations will not be allowed. Then you will demonstrate the system error when you try to enter values that are not allowed based on your settings. Note: The 'Driver' dimension is the one dimension per application whose members are used to compare against other dimension members to see if they are permissible. There is only one driver dimension per application but it can be used as a point of comparison with any other dimension in the application. 1.

Log on to the BW Server and in the UJ_Validation transaction code assign P_Acct as the 'Driver Dimension' for the SALES. a)

Log on to the BW Server: In the remote desktop → Start → 'SAP Frontend' shortcut → SAP Logon → Client: 801 → User: cpm-## → Password: 'training'

Figure 516: Log in


400


2010

BPC430


b)

Enter UJ_VALIDATION in the white 'command field' on the upper left → Enter:

Figure 517: Appset

c)

Select your appset BPC430_## → Assign Driver Dimension → Select P_Acct for the SALES application→ Save driver dimension settings.

Figure 518: Assign Driver Dimension


2010


401

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

2.

Set up the rule maintenance for the P_Acct CE0004830 'consulting costs' account so that if a record is posted against entity STORE1 it will fail. a)

Select the F3 key (or green arrow back) → Select Rule Maintenance → Use F4 to select the P_Acct dimension → Enter → Create Rule → Enter 'Consulting for Store1' → Use the account: CE0004830. → Add Dimension → Use F4 to select Entity → Select operator <> → For members use F4 to select Store1→ Save Rule

Figure 519: Planning member val: Create Rule

Note: The only operators are '<>' and '='. But you can include multiple single values separated by commas.


402


2010

BPC430


3.

Activate the rule for Manual data entry for the SALES. a)

Select F3 → F3 → Select 'Turn Validations On/Off' → Select 'Application ID': 'SALES → Turn manual planning on → Save validation settings → Stay on this screen.

Figure 520: Planning member val: Turning Val On

4.

Go to the Interface for Excel in the SALES application and use the account trend input template to test out your new configuration. a)



2010


403

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Figure 521: Current view

b)

In the Excel Interface: Data input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account - trend → Ok → Planning & Consolidation → Enter 125 in January → Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes You should receive the following message:


404


2010

BPC430


Figure 522: Error message

c)

Turn validation off for your SALES Application: In the BW Server → Select 'Off' for manual planning → 'Save validation settings'.

Figure 523: Turn validation off

2010


405

Unit 4: Planning

BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Model planning solutions. • Discuss criteria regarding what to plan in which system. • Work with delivered input schedules. • Do manual input bottom up planning. • Carry out top down planning. • Run allocations. • Use the commenting feature. • Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. • Discuss how to prevent invalid member combinations. • Use the spread, trend, and weight modeling options.

406


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Model planning solutions. • Discuss criteria regarding what to plan in which system. • Work with delivered input schedules. • Do manual input bottom up planning. • Carry out top down planning. • Run allocations. • Use the commenting feature. • Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. • Discuss how to prevent invalid member combinations. • Use the spread, trend, and weight modeling options.

2010


407

Unit Summary

408

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

409

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

410

BPC430


2010

Unit 5 EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting Unit Overview After completing this unit, you will be able to understand how to work with EV functions and to see which different EV functions exist.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • •

Use EV functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports. Create reports and input schedules from scratch. Set up EVDRE reports with the EVCOM function. Discuss all of the important EV functions that come with the product. Work with variance calculation and time offset functions. Work with EVHOT to do a report jump.

Unit Contents Lesson: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting ................................ 412 Exercise 13: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting ....................... 427

2010


411

Unit 5: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting

BPC430

Lesson: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting Lesson Overview Let's get to know other important EV functions that you can use to enhance your reports.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • • •

Use EV functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports. Create reports and input schedules from scratch. Set up EVDRE reports with the EVCOM function. Discuss all of the important EV functions that come with the product. Work with variance calculation and time offset functions. Work with EVHOT to do a report jump.

Business Example You need to add header information to your reports and you also need to convert an existing planning excel spreadsheet so you can use it against the central database. In addition you need to set up a report jump from a 'product by entity' report to an 'account by entity' report.

412


2010

BPC430

Lesson: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting

EV Functions You can use the EV functions to pull in meta data into your reports for display or for reference purposes. You can read about all of the delivered functions via • • • • • • • • • •

• •

The EvUSR (User ID) function returns the name of the user who is logged on to the system. The EvAST (Application set) function returns the name of the current application set. The EvAPP (Application) function returns the current application name. The EvDES (Description) function returns the description of a specified member. The EvDIM (Dimension) function retrieves a dimension name of the specified type from the database. The EVPRO function returns the value of a specified property for a specified member. The EvRTI function returns the time and date of the last data refresh. The EvCOM function references another cell and sends its value, a textual comment, to the database when specified. The EvHOT (hot link) function sets up a hot link to another report or cell within another report. Hot links can be used to guide a user through ad-hoc analysis. The EvGTS (Get value and scale) function retrieves a data value based on the specified members, and scales the value if the scale property is enabled on the dimension. This Send function references another cell and sends its value to the database when you select Send and Refresh Schedules. The EvTIM (time period offset) function specifies an offset from a given time period.

Here's the EVAST function:

Figure 524: Appset

2010


413


BPC430

These are the parameters for the EVDIM function. You can use this as reference in your workbook if you need to.

Figure 525: EVDIM

You can double click on the EVCVW output to set the current view. EVDRE templates use the EVCVW function in the page key range.

Figure 526: EVCVW

The EVCVW filter list is used to limit the members to a specified property value. For example, if your workbook only requires the use of entities with a currency of CHF.

414


2010

BPC430


Figure 527: Formula: EVCVW

Here's the output of a few of the functions we've been discussing.

Figure 528: Sample header section

If you need a description in your template, use EVDES. Note: If you leave the app name blank, it will use the current view.

2010


415


BPC430

Figure 529: EVDES

The title section below is using EVDES.

Figure 530: Title

Normally, EVDRE is used to send data. EVSND was used before EVDRE came along for the most part.

416


2010

BPC430


Figure 531: EVSND

The input template below is not using EVDRE.

Figure 532: Result without data

2010


417


BPC430

Figure 533: Result with data

This is another example of using EV functions (but not EVDRE).

Figure 534: Title

EVGTS can be used to get data as well as scale it. Do you want to see your values in thousands for example. EVDRE is not used instead of EVGTS or EVGET for the most part.

418


2010

BPC430


Figure 535: EVGTS in C10

Figure 536: Expanded result

2010


419


BPC430

Figure 537: EVBET - Function

Figure 538: EVBET - Result

420


2010

BPC430


Figure 539: Formula: EVBET in an EVDRE template

EVPRO is being used below to pull in the account type property. EVBET performs a variance calculation based on the acctype value. For example, if revenue actual is greater than plan, the variance if positive. However, if expense actual is higher than plan, the variance is negative.

Figure 540: EVBET - EVPRO Result

EVTIM can be used if you need to use offsets.

2010


421


BPC430

Figure 541: EVTIM Trending - Function

Figure 542: EVTIM Trending - Initial result

The EVTIM function automatically recognized your time granularity.

Figure 543: Formula: EVTIM Quarters

422


2010

BPC430


You can set the EVTIM level parameter to year to product year on year analyses for example.

Figure 544: EVTIM Trending - Level Results

You can use EVCOM in open rows of an EVDRE input template as well!

Figure 545: Functions with EVDRE - Result

Here's an example where we are pulling the user id, data of last refresh and server id into the header of a template:

2010


423


BPC430

Figure 546: Formula: meta data

The EvHOT (hot link) function sets up a hot link to another report or cell within another report. When you jump, you can specify one or more dimension members to pass as a filter value into the destination report. In the example below, you can see the initial 'Product by Entity Report'.

Figure 547: Formula: EVHOT - product by entity

The user now wants to view the account detail for the same report, so they double click on the 'ACCOUNT' link and Voila!

424


2010

BPC430


Figure 548: Formula: EVHOT - account by entity

The target account is stored in the wizard folder on the server. This was made possible by using the EVHOT function.

Figure 549: Function: EVHOT function

EVHOT Syntax: EvHOT(AppName,ReportName,DisplayName,Member1–N) AppName — The name of the application. You can connect to another application by specifying a different application ID.

2010


425


BPC430

ReportName — The name of the report. The root directory for Planning and Consolidation reports is the Wizard directory for the given application. Use the eTools Save Template Library option when creating the report. You must be authorized and advance the version for the user to have the appropriate reports. DisplayName — The text the user clicks to go to the specified report location. Member1–n — (Optional) The current view member. You can list as many members as you want, and you can link this as a member of the report or hard code it into the formula. For example, you may have an expansion of entities in the rows. The linked report may have accounts in the row, so you want to pass the specific row entity into the account template. End of the code. The following example creates a hot spot labeled 2008 Quarter 1 that the user can click to drill-down. EvHot(Finance,Report1.xlt,2008 Quarter 1,2008.Q1) .

426


2010

BPC430


Exercise 13: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to create reports from scratch using cell formulas including EVSND, EVGTS, EVBET,and EVTIM. • Use EV functions to add useful reference information to reports. • Use the EVBET function to help calculate variances. • Use EVTIM for time offsets. • Supplement EVDRE reports with other EV functions.

Business Example You need to add header information to your reports and you also need to convert an existing planning excel spreadsheet so you can use it against the central database. Use your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application.

Task 1: Convert a worksheet for EVSND input Take a native excel sheet that planners have been using offline and use EV functions to hook it up to the BPC data base. 1.

Open the provided worksheet and add functions to send data and also display header information.

Task 2: Create a cell based report from scratch Use EV functions including EVGTS to create a report from scratch. 1.

Open a blank workbook and add functions to read data and also display header information.

Task 3: Variance Calculations using EVBET Use the EVBET function to calculate 'intelligent' variances. 1.

EVBET is used to calculate variances in conjunction with the ACCTYPE property. The intent is to show a revenue variance for example as positive if it is higher than expected. Continued on next page

2010


427


BPC430

Task 4: Create a trend report with EVTIM Use the EVTIM function for time offsets in your column headers. Modify the 'EVGTS Cell Based' template. 1.

In this task we will add time into the columns and use the EVTIM function with offsets to create our trend report.

Task 5: Quiz - Using EV functions in an EVDRE Template After your boss saw what you can do with the EV functions, he/she asked for an EVDRE input schedule that allows for a year on year comparison and the capability to add comments. Create an input EVDRE template and modify it to produce the following result: 1.

Create an EVDRE input template as you see below using what you've learned so far.


428


2010

BPC430



Hint: Do all of the formatting manually. Do not use a formatting grid. Hint: Set the template type to 'input schedule'. Hint: For the two 2008 & 2009 columns, set their format to general. Hint: Enter the three accounts into the P_ACCT memberset separated with an extra ',' to create an empty row between them. Hint: Use an EVCOM function in J14:L14, J16:L16,J18:L18, for example the function in J14 looks like this:

Figure 551: Functions with EVDRE - EVCOM

Hint: Once you get your rows and columns set, turn off expansion by deleting the expansion range (A15:C21) from the evdre function in A1.


2010


429


BPC430

Task 6: EVHOT Use the EVHOT function to set up a report jump between two EVDRE templates. 1.

Create two evdre reports, one with product in the rows and one with accounts. Link them with an EVHOT function so the user can jump from the product to the account report. Note: Expand all as you change your current view.

430


2010

BPC430


Solution 13: EV Functions & Cell Based Reporting Task 1: Convert a worksheet for EVSND input Take a native excel sheet that planners have been using offline and use EV functions to hook it up to the BPC data base. 1.

Open the provided worksheet and add functions to send data and also display header information. a)

In the Excel Interface: Select the Office Document button on the upper left → Open → My Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → EVSND File → Open:

Figure 552: Native Workbook

b)



2010


431


BPC430

Figure 553: CV

c)

Now we'll set up the header of the input schedule which will be used as reference data for other functions. Starting with the Appset: In A1 Enter: 'Application Set' → In B1 → Insert function (Excel formula bar) → Planning and Consolidation → EVAST → Ok → Leave the argument blank → Ok → The function displays the appset name..

Figure 554: Appset

Note: The help link in Excel functions only has online help for Microsoft not BPC functions. d)

Now we need the application name: Enter 'Application' in A2 → In B2 insert EVAPP → Ok. Continued on next page

432


2010

BPC430


e)

Enter 'Application Description' in A3 → Insert EVAPD in B3 → Ok.

f)

Enter 'User Name' in A4 → Inset EVUSR in B4.

g)

In order to make the dimensions available, use the EVDIM function: In A5 → Insert EVDIM → Configure for the Rate dimension:

Figure 555: EVDIM

h)

Copy A5 to A6:7 → Change A6 to 'E' → Change A7 to 'C':

i)

Use EVCVW to lookup dimension members: Insert EVCVW in B5 → Use the F4 key to lock down rows and columns:


2010


433


BPC430

Figure 556: EVCVW

Note: You can double click on the EVCVW function and use it to select dimension members. The filter list is used to set a default limited list based on a property. For example, if you used a filter list of CURRENCY=CHF, the function would render a list of entities that have the CHF currency in master data. j)

Copy B5 to B6 and 7:

Figure 557: Header


434


2010

BPC430


k)

Add to the title area: In G13 → Insert EVDES:

Figure 558: EVDES

l)

Copy G13 to G14:

Figure 559: Title

m)

Set up the sending data function: In R17 → Insert EVSND → Use F4 to lock the rows and columns as shown:


2010


435


BPC430

Figure 560: EVSND

n)

Copy R17 down and then across to AD24.

Figure 561: EVSND Formulas

o)

Convert the workbook to an Input Schedule: eTools → Workbook options → Use the drop down to select the workbook type: Input Schedule → ok.

p)

Refresh the workbook: Expand all → Clear Input → Enter 2600 for the first account for all months → Send data → Send active worksheet:


436


2010

BPC430


Figure 562: Result without data

q)

Since rows 1-10 is for reference only, let's 'hide' them with an Excel group: Select rows 1-10 → Data → Group:

Figure 563: Row group

r)

Select the '-' to close it.

s)

Enter the values as shown in january → Copy to Feb-Dec → Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes (84 records) → Close.


2010


437


BPC430

Figure 564: Result with data

t)

Save your template on the company input schedules folder as 'Formula Schedule'.

Task 2: Create a cell based report from scratch Use EV functions including EVGTS to create a report from scratch. 1.

Open a blank workbook and add functions to read data and also display header information. a)

In the Excel Interface: Select the Office button on the upper left → New → Blank workbook:

b)



438


2010

BPC430


Figure 565: CV

c)

Now we'll set up the header of the report template which will be used as reference data for other functions. Set up your header area as explained below:


2010


439


BPC430

Figure 566: Header

d)

Build up your rows by copying the members from the P_ACCT dimension selector dialog box: Select the P_ACCT dimension hypertext on the upper right → Select the 3 accounts:

Figure 567: Select accounts

e)

Select the copy icon → Check the box:


440


2010

BPC430


Figure 568: Copy Accounts

f)

In A10 → Ctrl - V → In B10 → Insert EVDES → Specify only the member in A10 → Ok → Copy B10 to B12:

Figure 569: Rows

g)

Start on the title of the report: In C5 → Insert EVDES → Configure it to pick up the description of the Entity member:


2010


441


BPC430

Figure 570: EVDES in C5

h)

Copy C5 to C6 and C7 → Your title is complete:

Figure 571: Title

i)

Add headers for the two main columns: Enter BUDGET in C9 → Enter ACTUAL in D9 → Format them both: underlined, bold, right justified. Continued on next page

442


2010

BPC430


j)

Add the first EVGTS function: In C10 → Insert EVGTS:

Figure 572: EVGTS in C10

k)

Copy C10 to C11-12 and D10-12 → The functions need to be refreshed → Expand all

Figure 573: Expanded result


2010


443


BPC430

l)

Test the functions by changing a dimension member: Double click in B2 → Select Store2 → Did your values change?

m)

Hide the header section: Select rows 1-4 → 'Data' → Group → Close the group:

Figure 574: Row group and Store2 results

n)

Save your template to the company folder in the report folder as 'EVGTS Cell Based'. Leave it open for the next task.

Task 3: Variance Calculations using EVBET Use the EVBET function to calculate 'intelligent' variances. 1.

EVBET is used to calculate variances in conjunction with the ACCTYPE property. The intent is to show a revenue variance for example as positive if it is higher than expected. a)

Modify the 'EVGTS Cell Based' template: Enter EXTSALES in A10 and CE0001000 in A11 → Delete row 12 → Expand all:


444


2010

BPC430


Figure 575: EVBET - Initial Report

b)

Add a variance column: Enter the column header 'VARIANCE' in E9 → Format it like the other column headers.

c)

Add EVBET to calculate variances: Open your row group → Insert EVBET in E10 → Configure as follows:

Figure 576: EVBET - Function

d)

Format the data cells as numeric, no decimals, ',' for thousands and set Entity to Store1

e)

Since our test dataset has equivalent actual and budget figures for Extsales, enter 6,000,000 in C10 to see the effect of EVBET: Continued on next page

2010


445


BPC430

Figure 577: EVBET - Result

f)

Let's add the acctype property into our test report as a way to confirm the system calculation and also to practice using evpro: Insert a column before 'C → Enter → ACCTYPE in C9 → Insert EVPRO in C10:

Figure 578: EVBET - EVPRO function

g)

Copy the function to C11:


446


2010

BPC430


Figure 579: EVBET - EVPRO Result

h)

Save your template to the company folder in the report folder as 'EVBET Variance'.

Task 4: Create a trend report with EVTIM Use the EVTIM function for time offsets in your column headers. Modify the 'EVGTS Cell Based' template. 1.

In this task we will add time into the columns and use the EVTIM function with offsets to create our trend report. a)

Since we will put time in the columns, we'll take it out of the header and replace it with category: Open your 'Cell Based EVGTS' → In A3 → Replace 'T' with 'C'.

b)

Delete the contents in column D.

c)

Change your current view to 2009.JAN → Insert EVCVW into C9 → Reference the application in B1 and enter 'TIME' for the dimension:

d)

Select Ok:


2010


447


BPC430

Figure 580: 1st Column

e)

Insert EVTIM into D9: Note: The system will add '1' month to each column automatically.

Figure 581: EVTIM Trending - Function


448


2010

BPC430


f)

Select Ok → Copy the EVTIM formula to column N → Copy the EVGTS formulas as well → Expand all:

Figure 582: EVTIM Trending - Initial result

g)

EVTIM recognizes time granularity so that if you set your current view to a quarter, the system will display only quarters in the columns: Select 2008.Q1 in your current view:

Figure 583: EVTIM Trending - Quarters

h)

Save your template to the company folder in the report folder as 'EVTIM Trend'.

i)

Let's try this for years: Select 2007.TOTAL in your current view:


2010


449


BPC430

Figure 584: EVTIM Trending - Years

j)

The Level feature is used to show 'current vs. prior year' results for example: Modify the formula in D9 by adding YEAR as the 'level': Note: Level can only be used for 'YEAR.

Figure 585: EVTIM Trending - Level

k)

Copy D9 to E9 → Set time in your current view to 2007.JAN:


450


2010

BPC430


Figure 586: EVTIM Trending - Level Results

Task 5: Quiz - Using EV functions in an EVDRE Template After your boss saw what you can do with the EV functions, he/she asked for an EVDRE input schedule that allows for a year on year comparison and the capability to add comments. Create an input EVDRE template and modify it to produce the following result: 1.

Create an EVDRE input template as you see below using what you've learned so far.


2010


451


BPC430


Hint: Do all of the formatting manually. Do not use a formatting grid. Hint: Set the template type to 'input schedule'. Hint: For the two 2008 & 2009 columns, set their format to general. Hint: Enter the three accounts into the P_ACCT memberset separated with an extra ',' to create an empty row between them. Hint: Use an EVCOM function in J14:L14, J16:L16,J18:L18, for example the function in J14 looks like this:

Figure 588: Functions with EVDRE - EVCOM

Hint: Once you get your rows and columns set, turn off expansion by deleting the expansion range (A15:C21) from the evdre function in A1.


452


2010

BPC430


a)

Save your template to the company folder for input schedules as 'EVDRE with Functions'.

Task 6: EVHOT Use the EVHOT function to set up a report jump between two EVDRE templates. 1.

Create two evdre reports, one with product in the rows and one with accounts. Link them with an EVHOT function so the user can jump from the product to the account report. Note: Expand all as you change your current view. a)

In the Interface for Excel, use this current view:

Figure 589: Function: EVHOT cv

b)

Create an evdre w/ product in the rows: Open a blank workbook → Enter =evdre() in A1 → Refresh → Put product in the rows → Remove P_ACCT→ Ok → Enter the 'product by entity report' in E2 → Expand all:


2010


453


BPC430

Figure 590: Function: EVHOT product by entity (your values my vary)

c)

We want the user to be able to double click on a row / product to launch another report of accounts for that product: In F13 → Delete the existing formula→ Insert EVHOT → Configure as shown below:

Figure 591: Function: EVHOT - function

d)

Copy F13 to F14:17 → Format ACCOUNT to bold, italic, underlined, blue to make it look like hypertext.

e)

Save the report to the company folder in the reports folder as 'Product by Entity'.


454


2010

BPC430


f)

Create another evdre with account in the rows → set your row expansion so that the account total shows at the bottom as you see below → Format the data cells as shown → Enter in K2 'Account by Entity Report' → Expand all:

Figure 592: Function: evhot account by entity (your values may vary)

g)

Save your 'target' report: eTools → Company → Reports → Wizard → ACCOUNT → Save → Answer 'Yes' to increase the template version (to make it available to other users):


2010


455


BPC430

Figure 593: Function: EVHOT - save

h)

Test it out by setting the current view to CONUS while you are in the product by entity report: In the Product by Entity report → Set your current view to CONUS → Expand all → Double click on 'all cat products' → Respond 'yes' if prompted to reopen the account report → Voila!


456


2010

BPC430


Figure 594: Formula: EVHOT - test on 'all cat products' (your values my vary)

2010


457


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use EV functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports. • Create reports and input schedules from scratch. • Set up EVDRE reports with the EVCOM function. • Discuss all of the important EV functions that come with the product. • Work with variance calculation and time offset functions. • Work with EVHOT to do a report jump.

458


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Use EV functions to pull in descriptions and properties into your reports. • Create reports and input schedules from scratch. • Set up EVDRE reports with the EVCOM function. • Discuss all of the important EV functions that come with the product. • Work with variance calculation and time offset functions. • Work with EVHOT to do a report jump.

2010


459

Unit Summary

460

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

461

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

462

BPC430


2010

Unit 6 Drill Through Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: •

Set up and use the website, ECC, and BW Query drill throughs.

Unit Contents Lesson: Drill Through .............................................................. 464 Exercise 14: Drill Through..................................................... 481

2010


463

Unit 6: Drill Through

BPC430

Lesson: Drill Through Lesson Overview In this lesson we will see how to build drill through interfaces and use execute them from the Excel Interface.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •

Set up and use the website, ECC, and BW Query drill throughs.

Business Example Your business users really like the Interface for Excel but there is a lot of related information in the Web, ECC, and BW InfoCubes that they can put to good use.

Drill Through Lets' take a look at how to set up and use the drill through feature for the Web, BW Queries, and ECC. Note: Drill down is different than drill through. Drill down is used to drill down on member data within dimensions. You can drill down on members in a worksheet, or you can drill down on charts and graphs. Drill down is conducted within one report in the Excel interface whereas drill through is a 'jump' outside of the Excel Interface.

Figure 595: Drill through - Introduction

464


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Drill Through

Here is an example of why you may want to use the drill through feature: When SAP BusinessObjects Financial Information Management (FIM) is used to load data into Planning and Consolidation from external data sources (flat files, tables, 3rd party applications, or other EPM applications), this data is often transformed and aggregated. Planning and Consolidation only stores the final data, and users may want to drill-through into the details of the data that is stored in a FIM repository (staging area). The URL-based drill through makes this possible. To define a drill-through to a database table (Microsoft platform only) In the Administration Console, add a property named DrillKey to the dimension or dimensions for which you want to use drill-through (see Member Behavior Using Dimension Properties). Devise a DrillKey value and assign that value to any member of the dimension for which you want to use drill-through (see Maintenance of Dimension Members). If you are using an external database, create a database query in Interface for Excel by choosing Data Import External Data New Database Query (in Microsoft Office 2003) or Data From Data Source From Microsoft Query (in Microsoft Office 2007). On the Databases tab, click New Data source and give it a name that has some relevance to the database you are querying. Choose the appropriate driver for the type of database to which you are connecting. After entering the required data, name your query, then save it. Note: While defining your query, you can set the query filter to vary based on the current view of a dimension. You do this within the Query Wizard when setting filter data. To base the dimension on the current view, you can use the syntax %DimName%, where DimName is the dimension name you are referencing, such as %Entity%. Microsoft platform database drill through continued: Set up the drill-through and connect it to an application set by editing the following fields in the drill-through table using the Edit Drill-through Table task on the Administration page within the Interface for the Web module: DrillKey The value specified in the DrillKey property column for the dimension member on which you would like to drill through. Title The title appears at the top of the Drill Through page. FileName The name of your query file. For journals, a Journal query file is automatically built for you. For all other external databases, you must create a query file. MaxRows The maximum number of rows to display on one page. UserID and Password A valid user ID and password on the database to which you are querying. Here's a graphical view of the drill down options.

2010


465


BPC430

Figure 596: Drill through - Options

Drill through is a really 'cool' feature however you still need to decide when and now to use it.

Figure 597: Drill through - Benefits & costs

Drill throughs are created by application in the admin console. After you set up at least one drill through for an application, it is available to users of reports that reference that application.

466


2010

BPC430


Figure 598: Drill through - Admin console

Users will see the description of the drill through in Excel.

Figure 599: Drill through - URL id and description

2010


467


BPC430

When you map a parameter to a dimension, you also choose a dimension property, such as ID or EVDESCRIPTION. When the user performs a drill-through in a report, the parameter value is taken from the property value of the selected data cell. For example, if you select the ID property of a dimension, the member IDs are mapped. If you select another property of a dimension, that property value is mapped. Therefore, you can send either the dimension member or the value of a property. When you map a parameter to a user-defined value, you can hard code a value or use %CurrentUser%, or %CurrentDate%. If you specify a user-defined value in the mapping, when the user performs a drill-through in a report, the parameter value is based on the user-specified value.

Figure 600: Drill through - URL parameters

In the Excel Interface, the user can position their curser in a cell that they want the system to pass as a parameter to the website (in this case).

468


2010

BPC430


Figure 601: Drill through - Launch URL from Excel

As long as at least one drill through is created for an application, the user will have a drill through option in their in action pane when they have a template open.

Figure 602: Drill through - URL drill options

2010


469


BPC430

Based on the parameters and where the users curser is, a parameter is passed to the website.

Figure 603: Drill through - URL result

ECC Drill Through In our ECC scenario, we have loaded data from ECC however the entity and account members have been converted along the way. Therefore, we are using an entity property called 'company_code' to map STORE# to its related company code in ECC such as 1000.

Figure 604: Drill through - ECC entity mapping

470


2010

BPC430


Just like we did for the entity dimension, we are mapping the dimension member (EXTSALES) to a GL Account # in ECC.

Figure 605: Drill through - ECC account mapping

The ECC parameters below are using the ECC field names such as RACCT, RYEAR, and BUKRS as parameters. The ECC screen that we will jump to is controlled by an 'ok code' called ONLI. The 'property/value' settings are using properties for entity, account, and the time dimension. Note: The number of dimensions required will depend on which ECC screen you are drilling through to.

Figure 606: Drill through - ECC parameters

2010


471


BPC430

Figure 607: Drill through - ECC launch from Excel

Figure 608: Drill through - ECC action pane option

Note how the system passed the correct filter value for account, time, and company code in the example below! You can also use the EvMNU macro MNU_eTOOLS_DRILLTHROUGH_RUN to execute a drill-through using the syntax MNU_eTOOLS_DRILLTHROUGH_RUN(“drillthrough id”).

472


2010

BPC430


Figure 609: Drill through - ECC result: balance

Once you are in the balance screen you can double clik to see the line items.

Figure 610: Drill through - ECC result: line items

Accounting documents in ECC are created for every financial transaction and are a valuable piece of the audit trail.

2010


473


BPC430

Figure 611: Drill through - ECC result: data entry view

The header of a document displays the user name and date for example.

Figure 612: Drill through - ECC result: header

BW Drill Through

474


2010

BPC430


To carry out a drill through to a BW Query, you need a url and the query name to get started. You can use the default query URL as generated by the BW Server. Note: The query below is created on a BPC Infocube in this example. That's why the property/value '/cpmb/yydo2r4' is referred. If we drilled through to a 'normal' BW Infocube, that parameter would be 'comp_code' for example. Note: It is possible to drill down from a 'group' account in BPC to a BW query on an infocube with gl accounts. The gl accounts can be modeled in BW with group account as a navigational attribute and that way the user can look at a group (summary) account in BPC but then drill through to a BW and look at the detail by GL Account.

Figure 613: Drill through - BW parameters

Again, based on where the users curser is, that data intersection will be passed to the query.

2010


475


BPC430

Figure 614: Drill through - Launch BW from Excel

Figure 615: Drill through - BW result

There are a couple of tasks which are specifically for drill through.

476


2010

BPC430


Figure 616: Drill through - Security

The system supports the variables Current Date and Current User in the mapping. The format of Current Date is %CURRENTYYYYMMDD%, where YYYYMMDD is replaced by the current year, month, and day. You could then use %CURRENTYYYY% for sending out only the current year. The format for Current User is %CURRENTUSER%.

Figure 617: Drill through - System parameters

2010


477


BPC430

There is a restriction to keep in mind for the ECC drill throughs. If the ECC target has a pop-up that prompts the user for an organizational assignment for example, drill through will not work.

Figure 618: Drill through - Restriction (ECC)

The latest ECC release uses the web application server. Earlier releases use the ITS.

Figure 619: Drill through - Prerequisite for ECC transaction URL

Follow these instructions to look up the meta data you need.

478


2010

BPC430


Figure 620: Drill through - Prerequisite for ECC transaction codes

2010


479


480

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Exercise 14: Drill Through Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Configure and use the URL drill through feature. • Configure and use the BW Query drill through feature. • Configure and use the ECC drill through feature.

Business Example While working in the Excel interface, users typically need to access related data. So, they may need to perform a filtered jump to a website, related BW Query, or an ECC screen to look at general ledger details for example that don't exist in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation.

Task 1: URL Drill Through Configure the URL drill through to BING.COM in the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the URL drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application.

2.

Use the URL drill through in the Interface for Excel.

Task 2: BW Query Drill Through Configure the BW Query the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the BW Query drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430-## Appset and SALES Application.

2.

Use the BW Quer drill through in the Interface for Excel.

Task 3: ECC Drill Through Configure the ECC drill through to a General Ledger balance and line item screen in the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the ECC drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application. For this scenario, assume that we are converting Entities and P_Accts during data loads. For example, an Entity such as STORE1 Continued on next page

2010


481


BPC430

in BPC has been mapped to company code 1000 in ECC and so forth. P_ACCT ExternalSales in BPC has been converted from GL Accont 30110000 in ECC in this scenario as well. In order to allow a drill through from BPC to ECC therefore, we will link via the property values. For example, we will add the property COMPANY_CODE to the Entity dimension and STORE1 will have a company code property value of 1000 and so forth. P_ACCT will have a property of GL_ACCOUNT, and account ExternalSales will have a gl account property value of 30110000 that the system will use to 'connect' BPC to ECC data. Note: If the Entity member id and the Company Code id are the same between BPC and ECC, then we not need to perform a link via the entity member property. 2.

Use the ECC drill through in the Interface for Excel.

Result Now you know how to configure and execute SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Drill Throughs!

482


2010

BPC430


Solution 14: Drill Through Task 1: URL Drill Through Configure the URL drill through to BING.COM in the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the URL drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application. a)

Goto the Admin Console.

b)

In the Admin Console: On the upper left → Open up the Applications folder → Open the SALES Application → Drillthroughs → Select 'Add Drill Through' on the right:

Figure 621: URL Drill Through - Admin Console

c)

Name your drill through as follows:


2010


483


BPC430

Figure 622: URL Drill Through - URL ID

d)

Select the 'Parameter Mapping & Test' tab and configure as follows:

Figure 623: URL Drill Through - URL Parameters

e)

Test your drill through: Select 'Test' on the lower right → Enter an account description as follows:


484


2010

BPC430


Figure 624: URL Drill Through - Test an account

f)

Run the test, you should get this result:

Figure 625: URL Drill Through - Test Result

g)

Save your drill through: Select Next → Apply → Select your drill through to see the summary in the Admin Console. Continued on next page

2010


485


2.

BPC430

Use the URL drill through in the Interface for Excel. a)

From the Admin Console: Select 'Available Interfaces' → Interface for Excel → Select your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application → OK.

b)


Figure 626: URL Drill Through - Current View

c)

Open a dynamic template for the live test: Reporting & Analysis → Build a report using a dynamic template → Subtotals by Account → OK → Position your cursor as shown below:


486


2010

BPC430


Figure 627: URL Drill Through - Sub total by account

d)

Execute the filtered link: Select 'Drill through' on the right → Select BING_## → Continue:

Figure 628: URL Drill Through - Result

e)

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Enter: URL Drill Through → Save.


2010


487


BPC430

Task 2: BW Query Drill Through Configure the BW Query the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the BW Query drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430-## Appset and SALES Application. a)

In the Admin Console: On the upper left → Open up the Applications folder → Open the SALES Application → Drill throughs → Select 'Add Drill Through' on the right:

b)


Figure 629: BW Drill Through - ID

c)

On the parameters tab, configure your BW drill through. Use the BPC430 Drill Through Parameters file on the C drive to copy in the url and technical id's: Goto your remote computer → Start → Documents → My documents


488


2010

BPC430


→ use the drop down to select 'Local disk: C' → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Open the Drill Through Parameters file → Copy the url → Back in the Admin Console → Select the parameters tab → Fill in as shown below: Note: Everyone in the class will be jumping to the same query destination ie, the BPC430_query. Note: Input your 3 position server id. The BW Server id varies by class and group. Your trainer should have given you the system id already. If not, you can access it via: Remote computer → Programs → SAP Front End → SAP Logon → You should see the 3 position system id.

Figure 630: BW Drill Through - Parameters

Note: For each 'dimension' that you want to use as a filter criteria, you need two 'filters'. The iobjnm (info object name) and its technical BW id is the first. The 'value' is fed from your cursor position in the Excel report. d)

Test your drill through: Select 'Test' → Enter the filter values as follows:


2010


489


BPC430

Figure 631: BW Drill Through - Test

e)

Does your test look like this? Run Test → User: CPM-## → Password: training: Note: See how both entity and time are filtered? You could easily put more dimensions in the drill through to pass more filter values but we are keeping it short and sweet here in class.


490


2010

BPC430


Figure 632: BW Drill Through - Test Result

f) 2.

Save your drill through: Select Next → Apply → Select your drill through to see the summary in the Admin Console.

Use the BW Quer drill through in the Interface for Excel. a)


b)



2010


491


BPC430

Figure 633: BW Drill Through - Current View

c)

Build a custom report for the test: Reporting & Analysis → Open a blank workbook → Enter =EVDRE() in A1 → Planning & Consolidation → Refresh workbook → Place Entity in the rows → Remove P_ACCT from the rows → Ok → Position your cursor as shown below → Drill through:


492


2010

BPC430


Figure 634: BW Drill Through - Report

d)

Does your test look like this? Note: We are jumping to the BW version 3.x BEx Web Analyzer.

Figure 635: BW Drill Through - Result 1


2010


493


BPC430

e)

Did the numbers match up? Not quite right? In the Free Characteristics → Select the down arrow for Category → Now it is displayed in the rows → And the values should be the same as in the Excel template:

Figure 636: BW Drill Through - Result with category in rows

Note: The drill through target in this case is a query build on a BW Infocube that is also a BPC SALES Application just like yours. The target could easily have been on a number of other BW tables, views, and data sets. f)

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Enter: Query Drill Through → Save.

Task 3: ECC Drill Through Configure the ECC drill through to a General Ledger balance and line item screen in the Admin Console and use it in the Interface for Excel. 1.

Configure the ECC drill through in the Admin Console for your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application. For this scenario, assume that we are converting Entities and P_Accts during data loads. For example, an Entity such as STORE1 in BPC has been mapped to company code 1000 in ECC and so forth. P_ACCT ExternalSales in BPC has been converted from GL Accont 30110000 in ECC in this scenario as well. In order to allow a drill through from BPC to ECC therefore, we will link via the property values. For example, we will add the property COMPANY_CODE to the Entity dimension and STORE1 will have a company code property value of 1000 and so forth. Continued on next page

494


2010

BPC430


P_ACCT will have a property of GL_ACCOUNT, and account ExternalSales will have a gl account property value of 30110000 that the system will use to 'connect' BPC to ECC data. Note: If the Entity member id and the Company Code id are the same between BPC and ECC, then we not need to perform a link via the entity member property. a)

In the Admin Console: On the upper left → Open up your Appset → Open the dimension library → Select the Entity dimension on the upper left → Select 'Maintain Dimension Property' on the right → Enter the new property at the bottom as shown below: Note: You may not have the exact same list of properties as shown.

Figure 637: Entity Property

b)

Record the new property: Select 'Modify dimension property' on the lower right → Ok → With Entity still selected → 'Maintain dimension members' → Enter the following property values:


2010


495


BPC430

Figure 638: Entity property values

c)

Record your new master data: Process dimension → Deselect 'take system offline' → Ok → Ok.

d)

Now we will modify the P_ACCT dimension. In the Admin Console: Select the P_ACCT dimension on the upper left → Select 'Maintain Dimension Property' on the right → Enter the new property at the bottom as shown below: Note: You may not have the exact same list of properties as shown.

Figure 639: P_Acct Property


496


2010

BPC430


e)

Record the new property: Select 'Modify dimension property' on the lower right → Ok → With P_Acct still selected → 'Maintain dimension members' → Enter the following property value:

Figure 640: P_Acct property value

f)

Record your new master data: Process dimension → Deselect 'take system offline' → Ok → Ok.

g)

In the Admin Console: On the upper left → Open up the Applications folder → Open the SALES Application → Drill throughs → Select 'Add Drill Through' on the right:

h)


Figure 641: ECC Drill Through - ID


2010


497


BPC430

i)

On the parameters tab, configure your ECC drill through: Select the parameters tab → Fill in as follows: Note: Everyone in the class will be jumping to the same ECC system and data. Note: Copy the URL from the BPC430 Drill Thru txt file on the c drive. (the url is broken down on 3 lines, so either use the delete key to put all of the code on one line and copy it, or copy each line individually.

Figure 642: ECC Drill Through - Parameters

j)

Test your drill through: Select 'Test' → Enter the filter values as follows: Note: Since we are drilling through to ECC based on the member property values, we need to use the master data values as they are in ECC for this test, so we'll use the property values in this case.


498


2010

BPC430


Figure 643: ECC Drill Through - Test

k)

Does your test look like this? Run Test → Log in (take your time here) → You are now in a web view of ECC in the GL Balance report. Client

800

User

soper

Password

Dallas99

Note: Log on to ECC with a client of: 800 a user of: soper and password of: Dallas99. (only 'D' as in big 'D' is in CAPS) If you receive an https error, try one more time.


2010


499


BPC430

Figure 644: ECC Drill Through - Test Result

l) 2.

Save your drill through: Select Next → Apply → Select your drill through to see the summary in the Admin Console.

Use the ECC drill through in the Interface for Excel. a)


b)



500


2010

BPC430


Figure 645: ECC Drill Through - Current View

c)

As part of this 'simulation', you will manually input data in BPC that matches up with the ECC drill through data selection. Use a delivered input template for the test: Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template→Nested row → Open the control panel via the '+' in column J → Unhide any hidden rows → Enter the keyword 'SELF' in G52 (so that the system will select the current view member itself) → Expand all → Select Ok to clear any data → Enter the data as follows:

Figure 646: BW Drill Through - Report

d)

Send your data: Send data → Send active worksheet → Yes → Close. Continued on next page

2010


501


BPC430

e)

Save your template: eTools → Save dynamic templates → Company → Input schedules → Enter: ECC Drill Through → Save.

f)

Drill through with your cursor on Store1 for 2008.JAN: Select the back arrow → Drill through:

Figure 647: ECC Drill Through - Result

g)

Drill through to ECC → Logon with user: soper password: Dallas99 → Does your test look like this? Note: We are jumping to an ECC 6.0 system.


502


2010

BPC430


Figure 648: ECC Drill Through - Balance Report

h)

Double click on The 225,000 balance to see the line items:


2010


503


BPC430

Figure 649: ECC Drill Through - Line Items

i)

To see one of the line items: Select the 1st row → Display document.

Figure 650: ECC Drill Through - Display document

j)

To the debit and credit for this document: Call up document overview

Figure 651: ECC Drill Through - Document overview

k)

To see who posted this ECC document and when: Select More → Display document header.


504


2010

BPC430


Figure 652: ECC Drill Through - Display document header

l)

Close your ECC session.

Result Now you know how to configure and execute SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Drill Throughs!

2010


505


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Set up and use the website, ECC, and BW Query drill throughs.

Related Information •

506

[Enter an optional reference using the URL tag to additional information that learner may find useful. Examples include websites or whitepapers. Delete if not used.]


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Set up and use the website, ECC, and BW Query drill throughs.

2010


507

Unit Summary

508

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

509

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

510

BPC430


2010

Unit 7 Business Process Flows Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Build a BPF for Planning. Use the BPF user interfaces.

Unit Contents Lesson: Using Business Process Flows ......................................... 512 Exercise 15: Planning Business Process Flow ............................. 541

2010


511

Unit 7: Business Process Flows

BPC430

Lesson: Using Business Process Flows Lesson Overview In this lesson we will see how to build and use a BPF for Planning.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Build a BPF for Planning. Use the BPF user interfaces.

Business Example In this lesson we will see how to build and use a BPF for Planning. Your company or client is interested in a solution to control the Planning process and provide a user interface to the users that clearly identifies what step(s) they need to carry out. Management is also interested in a monitoring and control device whereby approval steps can be used. Business Process Flows (BPFs) guide users through the sequence of tasks within a defined business process. Business process flows are comprised of steps that must be completed sequentially, and substeps, which can be optional. Depending on a user's role, the steps available to them can involve completing actions, or reviewing submitted actions.

Build a planning BPF In this section we will go over the build concepts of BPF's. Note: The objective of this unit is to see how we can use BPF's to do Planning not necessarily to become experts at how to create BPF's.

512


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Using Business Process Flows

Figure 653: What a BPF Does and Does Not Do

Figure 654: New Concepts in BPF's

2010


513


BPC430

Figure 655: BPF Terminology -1

Figure 656: BPF Terminology - 2

Building a BPF template is the first step. One template can be used multiple times. For example one template could be used by all 12 of your Divisions.

514


2010

BPC430


Here's what ours will look like: Note: In the example below, the business requirement called for separate tracking of the Upload step vs. the Import step. If that were not the case, it would then make more sense to include the Import sub step after the import sub step in step one. In addition, any step with only one sub step could have the action assigned directly to the step without using a sub step.

Figure 657: BPF - Steps and sub steps

Figure 658: Defining a BPF Template

2010


515


BPC430

To begin creating a BPF template, you must provide details, such as name, description, and controlling application of the BPF (see Setting Up Business Process Flows). You add steps to represent the flow of the business process (see Defining Steps and Sub-Steps). You can copy or modify an existing step or substep. You can also reorder steps and substeps using up and down arrows. You add actions to define the specific tasks users perform within the steps of the process (see Defining Actions). An action can be any user authorized task, for example, opening a schedule, publishing a report, or approving entered data. You review the information and parameters you provided throughout the template creation process in the Finish BPF step. You validate the BPF template definition to ensure it is properly defined and completed. This also allows you to check whether any changes made in the application have impacted the template definition. If you do not manually validate the template, the system automatically validates it when you choose Create BPF Instance. Template validation is a prerequisite for creating an instance.

Figure 659: BPF Template - Definition

516


2010

BPC430


Figure 660: Defining BPF Steps and Sub Steps

Figure 661: Creating a Step

2010


517


BPC430

Figure 662: Owners, Managers, and Reviewers

Figure 663: Defining a Step Region

The owner of a step region is the person responsible for completing the step region. The reviewer is the person who must verify the actions taken in a particular step region. Owners and reviewers can be individual users or made up of a team of users. Two or more users can select the same step region concurrently, as multiple users may be involved in the completion of a step region. If you are the responsible reviewer for a step region, you see a Review flag in the Action Required column. You can choose Accept or Reject in that step. Accept sets the step region to status Completed. Reject causes the step region to remain open until the user resubmits it for approval.

518


2010

BPC430


Figure 664: BPF: Step 1 - Region Criteria

Figure 665: Four Steps Completed

2010


519


BPC430

Figure 666: BPF: Upload Sub Step

As you can see below, the parent child relationship for the components is: Step → Sub step → Action → Interface / Task. (assuming you need a sub step).

Figure 667: Upload Actions

520


2010

BPC430


Figure 668: Import review action

When the reviewer runs their report, you can predetermine their current view.

Figure 669: Import review current view

The labor sub step will have spread, trend, and weight as hypertext options in the customized action pane.

2010


521


BPC430

Figure 670: Labor input action

Figure 671: Spread action

You can launch work status from the BPF. They go hand in hand.

522


2010

BPC430


Figure 672: Work Status Action

Figure 673: Finish and Save a BPF Template

A BPF instance is an iteration of a business process flow template that is in active use. Example: An authorized user can create a BPF template called Monthly Reporting to coordinate the monthly reporting activities of various personnel. When that user, or another authorized user, creates a business process flow for a specific period, such as November 2009, based on the Monthly Reporting template, the November 2009 BPF is considered an instance. In this example, there are 12 instances of the Monthly Reporting BPF, one for each month of the year.

2010


523


BPC430

Figure 674: Managing a BPF Instance

The authorized user can create a Business Process Flow (BPF) instance within the administration console. This activates a BPF template using a specific BPF identifier, which enables end-user participation in the process. It also establishes the BPF instance owner.

Figure 675: Create Instance

524


2010

BPC430


Figure 676: Set Instance Owner

Note: The graphic below is the same one a few pages back. It is also included in your books here for convenience.

Figure 677: Owners, Manager, and Reviewers

2010


525


BPC430

Figure 678: Instance Preview

After creating the instance, it must be activated before anyone can use it.

Figure 679: Finalizing a BPF Instance

Figure 680: Sizing Restrictions

Run a Planning BPF In this section we will use the BPF to carry out a few of the key steps in a sample Planning process.

526


2010

BPC430


Figure 681: Accessing BPF's

My Activities displays the processes and steps in which the currently logged-on user can perform certain actions. You can open a specific step region or activity and execute tasks for that step region.

2010


527


BPC430

Figure 682: My Activities

Steps can have the following statuses: Open: waiting for completion or to be submitted as a new step region Submitted: action has been taken and the step region is waiting for review Completed: the step region is fully completed Reopened: the step has been reopened for further action. The previous step (or specific step region in the case of matching) must be at Completed status to be reopened. Pending: the step region is waiting for an open step to be completed. Users cannot perform actions on pending step regions. Rejected: a reviewer has rejected a step region action, the step region is open again for user action Delayed: completion of the step region has been delayed due to the previous step being reopened. Users cannot perform actions on delayed step regions.

528


2010

BPC430


Figure 683: Data manager upload

Figure 684: Data Manager

2010


529


BPC430

Figure 685: Transaction files

One user would select 'complete', another user ... the reviewer would approve or reject.

Figure 686: Import complete: Select Account Trend

530


2010

BPC430


Figure 687: 2008 Account trend

The values above let's say, make sense, so the step was approved.

Figure 688: Copy package settings

2010


531


BPC430

Figure 689: Copy from and to

Figure 690: Reval labor package & parameters

532


2010

BPC430


Figure 691: Comparison report

Figure 692: Active instances report after step3

2010


533


BPC430

Figure 693: Step region report after step 3

In this example below, we did not want the users to affect data that was loaded from the source system. So we are using a different datasrc to keep the values separate.

Figure 694: Labor update

534


2010

BPC430


Figure 695: Work status step 1 of 2

Figure 696: Set status to approved for all children

After the status is set to approved, a user tries to enter data, look what happens below:

2010


535


BPC430

Figure 697: Rejected data

Figure 698: Completed BPF

One of the main features of the BPF is the status tracking. The monitor plays an important role in that.

536


2010

BPC430


Figure 699: Monitor for steps

Figure 700: Monitor - group by region

2010


537


BPC430

Figure 701: Factors Affecting Re Opening (1)

Figure 702: Factors Affecting Reopening (2)

Instance owners receive an e-mail notification when a new instance is created or an action is taken in a specific instance. The owner of a step region receives a notification when the step region is ready for action to be taken. The responsible reviewer for a step region receives notification that the step region is ready for review. When a BPF instance is created, all users with access to the BPF monitor receive a notification. The BPF Instance owner receives an e-mail notification when the BPF is completed and ready to be finalized.

538


2010

BPC430


Figure 703: E-Mail Notifications

Figure 704: Work Status Concept

2010


539


BPC430

Figure 705: Security, Work Status, BPF Integration Concept

540


2010

BPC430


Exercise 15: Planning Business Process Flow Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and execute a planning BPF.

Business Example You need to create a BPF for your planning process.

Task 1: Create a BPF 1.

Create a new BPF with 4 steps from the Admin Console. This is what it will look like when you are done building it:


2.

Create the Sub Steps.

3.

Create the Actions. Continued on next page

2010


541


4.

BPC430

Validate, Create the Instance, and Activate your BPF.

Task 2: Executing a Planning Business Process Flow Test your BPF. 1.

542

Access your BPF from the Web Interface.


2010

BPC430


Solution 15: Planning Business Process Flow Task 1: Create a BPF 1.

Create a new BPF with 4 steps from the Admin Console. This is what it will look like when you are done building it:


a)

In the Admin Console → Confirm that you are in your BPC430_## Appset → Select Business Process Flows on the lower left → On the right → 'Create new BPF template'.


2010


543


BPC430

Figure 708: Create a new BPF Template

b)

Enter 'Expense Planning' as the name and description → Confirm PLANNING as the Controlling application. Note: The entity dimension of the planning application will be used to determine owners and reviewers.

c)

Determine the data region for your BPF: Select 'B. Instance Identifier' on the upper left → Check off Entity and C_Category. Note: Time is the only required dimension. It is best practice to select at least two dimensions to define an instance. The instance will be used to determine the status of the steps.

d)

Select 'C. Set Access' on the upper left → Double click on the ADMIN team to move it to the right to the 'Selected' box.

e)

Create step one: Select 'Next' → Add → Make your selections as you see below: Note: ‘Allow Reopen’ will allow that step to be reopened after completion. If this is set to ‘No’ that step can’t be reopened during execution. Opening criteria ‘All Step Regions’ will enable opening of the next step only after all step regions are complete whereas in the case of ‘Matched Step Region’ when you complete a step region, the next step opens for the same step region. The first step of the BPF always opens regardless of the opening criteria. Defining these options will be important for the second step onwards. Continued on next page

544


2010

BPC430


Figure 709: Create Step One

f)

Select 'Define step region criteria...' → Make the following selections: Note: To select a dimension member, first left click in the field and it turns gray, then left click again and a selector box pops up. You can select up to six. Note: The ‘Choose reviewer property’ is grayed out because you did not check the box ‘Enable Reviewers’ in the earlier screen. You can select any property as the owner property. The property that you select must have a fully qualified (including the domain) user name. The same rule applies for the reviewer property that you will use in the next BPF step you create.


2010


545


BPC430

Figure 710: Step 1 - Region Criteria

g)

Create Step Two: Select Ok → Ok → Add:


546


2010

BPC430


Figure 711: Create Step 2

h)

Select 'Define step region criteria...' → Make the following selections:


2010


547


BPC430

Figure 712: Step 2 Region Criteria

i)

Select preview to see what users are determined:

Figure 713: Preview Step 2

j)

Create step Three: Select Ok 3 times → Add:



548


2010

BPC430


k)

'Define step region criteria':


l)

Create step Four: Select Ok twice → Add:


2010


549


BPC430


m)

'Define step region criteria':


550


2010

BPC430



n)

Select Ok → Ok → Save → Ok → You should have the following 4 steps.

Figure 718: Four Steps Completed

2.

Create the Sub Steps. a)

Create the Upload sub step: Select Step 1 → Select ”Add New Sub Step' → Add a name and description as you see below:


2010


551


BPC430

Figure 719: Upload Sub Step

b)

Select Ok Note: If you receive this message in subsequent steps, select 'yes'.

Figure 720: Message on 1st Sub Step

c)

→ Select 'Yes' to assign all actions to the sub steps → Select Step 2→ Add new sub step → Use a name and description of 'IMPORT'. Note: Since the first 2 steps only have one sub step each, their actions could alternatively be assigned directly to the steps.

d)

In a similar fashion → Add the sub steps as you see below → Save → Ok.


552


2010

BPC430


Figure 721: Save steps and sub steps

3.

Create the Actions. a)

Create the Upload Action: Select 'Next' → Select the 'Upload Actual File' sub step → Modify the default action name to 'Upload Actual File' → Select the Interface to Data Manager → Select the 'Data Upload' task → Add a second 'Preview Data' action → Select the Interface to Data Manager → Select the 'Data Preview' task:

Figure 722: Upload Actions


2010


553


BPC430

Figure 723: Upload preview action

b)

Add a review action to the Import step: Select the 'Import Actual Data' step → Review Actions tab → Add → Enter 'Account Trend' → Ok → Configure the task and current view as shown below:

Figure 724: Import review action


554


2010

BPC430


Figure 725: Import review current view

c)

Configure the import sub step: Select the 'Import' sub step → Set the interface and task to 'Data Manager' and 'Run User Package' for the first action → Modify it to 'Import Actual' → Add the second action as you see below:

Figure 726: Import sub step actions

d)

For the 'Copy' planning function sub step: Fill in the interface and task as you see below: Continued on next page

2010


555


BPC430

Figure 727: Copy actions

e)

For the 'Revaluation' planning function sub step: Fill in the interface and task as you see below:


556


2010

BPC430


Figure 728: Revaluation actions

f)

Comparison Report Action: Fill in the interface and task as you see below:

Figure 729: Comparison report action


2010


557


g)

BPC430

Select the default members for the Comparison Report current view as you see below:

Figure 730: Comparison report current view

h)

Set up the 1st labor sub step action and current view as you see below:

Figure 731: Labor input action


558


2010

BPC430


Figure 732: Labor input action current view

i)

Set up the 'Spread' labor sub step action as you see below:

Figure 733: Spread action

j)

Add the 'Trend' and 'Weight' actions to the labor sub step using the same technique.


2010


559


k)

BPC430

Set up the 'Other Expense' sub step action and current view as you see below:

Figure 734: Other expense input action

Figure 735: Other expense input action current view


560


2010

BPC430


l)

Work Status Action: Fill in the interface and task as you see below → Also set Entity, Time, and Category 'current view type' to 'Inherit from BPF Instance'. Note: For each dimension, note the current view type. Since you selected Category, Entity, and Time in the instance identifier, you have an option to inherit those values from the BPF instance.

Figure 736: Work Status Action

4.

Validate, Create the Instance, and Activate your BPF. a)

Validate the BPF: 'Close' → Select Yes regarding the save prompt → Select your BPF → 'Validate BPF Template' → Yes → Ok → Yes.


2010


561


BPC430

Figure 737: Validate Template

b)

Create an Instance: Select your BPF → 'Create BPF Instance' → Set the data region

Figure 738: Create Instance


562


2010

BPC430


c)

Select 'Create BPF Instance' → Set Instance Owner → Select your domain and user: ADTWDFVM2001\CPM-##:

Figure 739: Set Instance Owner

d)

'Create BPF Instance' → Finish.

Figure 740: Instance Preview


2010


563


e)

BPC430

Activate the Instance: Select Business Process flows on the left → 'Manage BPF Instance' → Set status to inactive → Refresh → Select your instance → Activate → Ok. Your BPF is now ready to use.

Task 2: Executing a Planning Business Process Flow Test your BPF. 1.

Access your BPF from the Web Interface. a)

From the Admin Console: Open 'Available Interfaces' → 'Interface for the Web' → 'Business Process Flows'.

Figure 741: Accessing a BPF

b)

Select your BPF → You should see 4 steps underneath the BPF.


564


2010

BPC430


Figure 742: My Activities

c)

Select the 'Upload actual data' step → Select the 'Run actual file' sub step → Log into the Excel Interface in PLANNING if prompted → You will see a pop-up 'Data Manager Upload' → Select the source file drop down → My Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → 2008ACT.csv → Open → Select the destination file drop down → Save → Ok: (Overwrite the file if necessary)

Figure 743: Data manager upload

d)

Ok → Preview Data → Double click the file → Close → Back to BPF. → Complete → Back to my activities. Continued on next page

2010


565


e)

BPC430

Select the Import Actual Data step → Select the Import Actual sub step →(if prompted about a possible invalid BPF, select Ok) → You will get the data manager popup:

Figure 744: Data Manager

f)

Run the 'Import transaction data' package → Select the files as shown including the provided ACTTRANS transformation file:

Figure 745: Transaction files


566


2010

BPC430


g)

Next → Finish → Ok → View status → (run it again if no log appears) You should have a white check in a blue box (successful) → Close → Cancel → 'Back to BPF' (if you don't see this option, select the web session in your status bar) → Complete → And now normally another user (reviewer) would run the 'Account Trend': Note: Enter through any warning messages.

Figure 746: Import complete: Select Account Trend


2010


567


BPC430

Figure 747: 2008 Account trend

h)

'Back to BPF' → Approve → Back to my activities → Now the first 2 steps are complete:

Figure 748: Two steps complete

i)

Launch Planning Functions: Select the planning functions step and then the Copy sub step → (if prompted about a possible invalid BPF, select Ok) → Run the copy package → Make these settings:

Figure 749: Copy package settings


568


2010

BPC430


j)

Next → Copy from Actual to ACTBUD → Copy from all 2008 months to all 2009 months:

Figure 750: Copy from and to

k)

Next → Finish → Ok → View status → Close → Cancel the data manager pop up → Go back to your BPF session.

l)

Select Revaluation → (if prompted about a possible invalid BPF, select Ok) → In the Financial Processes folder → Run the REVAL_LABOR package for all the months in 2009:


2010


569


BPC430

Figure 751: Reval labor package & parameters

m)

Next → Finish → View Status →Close → Cancel the data manager pop up → Go back to your BPF session → 'Run Comparison Report': (isn't this cool!)


570


2010

BPC430


Figure 752: Comparison report

n)

'Back to BPF' → Complete.

o)

Let's run the 'active instances report': Back to 'My Activities'→ 'Active instances report' → Select your template via the drop downs:


2010


571


BPC430

Figure 753: Active instances report after step3

p)

Let's run the 'active instance step regions report': Back to BPF → 'Active instance step regions report' → Select your template and instance via the drop down:

Figure 754: Step region report after step 3

q)

My activities → 'Manual input planning' → 'Labor' →Social security is going down so ... Input -5000 to adjust the social contributions budget → 'Send and Refresh Schedules' → Yes → Close: Note: We are using a different datasrc member to manual adjustments separate.


572


2010

BPC430


Figure 755: Labor update

r)

Back to BPF → Other Expense → No changes:

Figure 756: Other expenses

s)

Back to BPF → Set work status → Select 'Another current view' → Make your selections as you see below:


2010


573


BPC430

Figure 757: Work status step 1 of 2

t)

Continue → Select 'children' so that the status will be inherited automatically to lower level members:


574


2010

BPC430


Figure 758: Set status to approved for all children

u)

Test your work state: Approved → Continue → Back to BPF. 'Other Expense' → Enter 600 for steam → 'Send and Refresh Schedules' → Refresh → Yes → You should get an error message: Note: If your data is not rejected, try running the connection wizard to get a complete refresh.

Figure 759: Rejected data

v)

Close the error message → Back to BPF → Set work status → Set your 'other current view' to H1, ACTBUD and 2009.TOTAL → Continue → Include children → Submitted → Continue → Back to BPF → Complete → Back to my activities:


2010


575


BPC430

Figure 760: Completed BPF

w)

Check out the monitor: 'Monitor' → Select your BPF to see the status of the steps:

Figure 761: Monitor for steps

x)

If you had several regions running a BPF, you can see the status for all them on one screen: Select 'Show the groups pane' (right arrow) → Use the drop down to set the 'group by' to data region: Continued on next page

576


2010

BPC430


Figure 762: Monitor - group by region

y)

2010

If for some reason (such as testing) you need to reset a BPF instance: From the admin console → Select Business Process Flows → Manage instances → Status: waiting finalization → Refresh → Select the instance → Reset → Active → Refresh → Your instance should appear.


577


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Build a BPF for Planning. • Use the BPF user interfaces.

578


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Build a BPF for Planning. • Use the BPF user interfaces.

2010


579

Unit Summary

580

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

581

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

582

BPC430


2010

Unit 8 Xcelsius Integration Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Create a dashboard where you can read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data. Use the connectors for SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data and metadata.

Unit Contents Lesson: Xcelsius Integration ...................................................... 584 Exercise 16: Xcelsius - Reading Live Data ................................. 601 Exercise 17: Optional: Xcelsius - Writing Live Data ....................... 625

2010


583

Unit 8: Xcelsius Integration

BPC430

Lesson: Xcelsius Integration Lesson Overview This lesson covers the key integration points of Xcelsius to SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidationas well as the key benefits of the integration.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

Create a dashboard where you can read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data. Use the connectors for SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data and metadata.

Business Example You have business users who want to incorporate SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data into their management dashboards. In this section, let's take a look at how you can leverage Xcelsius to read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data. Xcelsius 2008 is a data visualization software that enables users to create dynamic and interactive models that can be added to dashboards or exported for delivery in a variety of formats. The software includes a fully-functioning Excel spreadsheet. Data and formulas can be imported or entered directly into the embedded spreadsheet and then modified, as required, without re-importing the spreadsheet. Here's an example.

584


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Xcelsius Integration

Figure 763: Xcelsius - a read / write example

Figure 764: Xcelsius dashboarding tool

2010


585


BPC430

Figure 765: Xcelsius details

To design a visual model of your data, you simply place components onto the canvas and link them to the data in the spreadsheet. Xcelsius 2008 includes a wide range of components, such as dials, gauges, charts, maps, picklists, sliders. You can configure these components to display data directly from the spreadsheet, to write data to the spreadsheet so it can be used by other components, or to accept data entered by users when the model is running. Xcelsius models can be exported into a variety of formats, such as PowerPoint, Flash, PDF, AIR, Outlook, and the web (using HTML). These models retain their full interactivity and require only Adobe Flash Player to run. The Xcelsius designer and Microsoft Excel are required only during the design Phase. Depending on your Xcelsius 2008 edition, you can configure your model to work with live data updates from external sources, such as XML, Portals, Web Services, SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise (LiveOffice and Query as a Web Service), and SAP Business Explorer Queries.

586


2010

BPC430


Figure 766: Xcelsius: Steps to build a model

Xcelsius 2008 models conform to SWF file format. SWF is the vector-based graphics format designed to run in the Adobe Flash Player. Because a SWF file is vector-based, its graphics are scalable and play back smoothly on any screen size and across multiple platforms. Also, a vector-based file usually has a smaller file size than other animations. Xcelsius 2008 files are stored in a zipped format with an XLF extension. The XLF file format contains the Xcelsius 2008 model information and its associated embedded spreadsheet file. Note:Xcelsius 2008 requires Adobe Flash version 9 or later. Newer Flash versions have security features that may prevent models from connecting to an external data source when running them outside the Xcelsius designer.

2010


587


BPC430

Figure 767: Xcelsius - EPM connector options

Xcelsius dashboards will pull live data from SAP BPC through a new Native EPM Connector for Xcelsius. The upper slide shows which EPM Connectors exist. SAP NetWeaver BW has an Xcelsius® connector that connects Xcelsius® to live BW data. Since BW Queries can now work on SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation data, you can use this connectivity to access SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation data from Xcelsius®. Note:This connectivity does not currently provide view inheritance or use SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation security. Also, you should only deploy Xcelsius® models to the SAP NetWeaver® Portal. If you export the Xcelsius® SWF Flash file to any other source (PDF, Word, PPT, and so on), SAP BW data is not retrieved.

588


2010

BPC430


Figure 768: Xcelsius: display BPF metadata

Figure 769: Xcelsius: display current view

2010


589


BPC430

Figure 770: Xcelsius: change the current view option

Figure 771: Xcelsius: display appset list

590


2010

BPC430


Figure 772: Xcelsius: display dimension member list

You also display documents from the BPC content library (txt files only).

Figure 773: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - create report

2010


591


BPC430

Figure 774: Xcelsius: using the analyzer for read - connect

Figure 775: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - choose application

592


2010

BPC430


Figure 776: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - build report

Analyzer will filter to a default member (of its own choosing) if you don’t specify a member, so it is important to fully qualify all dimensional filters when using a dimension.

Figure 777: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - data grid

2010


593


BPC430

Figure 778: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - bind

Figure 779: Xcelsius: Using analyzer for read - results

594


2010

BPC430


Figure 780: Xcelsius: using the analyzer for write - connector

The SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid is not shipped with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. It is an optional component available for download on SDN at:https://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/scn/go/portal/prtroot/docs/library/uuid/8032028f-82c7-2b10-0995-8333d8041b30 . SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid links SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and Xcelsius® via a SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Web session. Data is retrieved using SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Web service URL generation. Data is displayed using a custom add-on installed into Xcelsius.

Figure 781: Xcelsius: using the analyzer for write - writeback button

2010


595


BPC430

Figure 782: Xcelsius: using the analyzer for write - result

Figure 783: Xcelsius: using the analyzer for write - best practices

596


2010

BPC430


Figure 784: Xcelsius: publish to BPC Excel

Microsoft Office 2007 applications do not currently keep an embedded Flash file. Files must be saved as a 97-2003 document type. When embedding the model within Microsoft Office, it is recommended to design the models in a way where filters are being set in action pane. The Xcelsius® dashboard only inherits current view members if they aren’t included in the page header of the Analyzer query. Any dimension used in the page header does not inherit from current view unless the GetCurrentView service is used. An Xcelsius® document can be published to PDF, this is an Xcelsius® native functionality. Xcelsius 2008 is available in several editions to address different needs. All editions have the same basic functionality. The primary difference between editions are the formats that models can be exported to and the ability to access and configure external data connections. Xcelsius 2008 is available in the following four editions: • Xcelsius Present enables users to create models with Microsoft Excel data.• Xcelsius Engage enables users to create models and connect them to a single external data sources.• Xcelsius Engage Server enables users to create models,connect them to multiple external data sources, and deploy them in a portal environment.• Xcelsius Enterprise enables users to create models and deploy them in a Business Objects Enterprise or SAP NetWeaver BW environment. The diagram explains the relevant components on how they interact. Single Sign on configuration available through BOE CMS. There is no additional configuration needed specifically for Xcelsius. Xcelsius® can access

2010


597


BPC430

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 data via a variety of methods: Through the new ODBO providerThrough Web ServicesThrough an XMLA query All methods access the data trough the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Shared Query Engine (SQE).

Figure 785: Xcelsius: installation and configuration requirements

To run Xcelsius® based flash files, you need Adobe Flash Player installed the client PC. If Adobe Flash Player is not installed, you are prompted to download it from Adobe website. To build Xcelsius® models, the following require to be installed: SAP BusinessObjects Xcelsius® 2008 SP2. The Support Package 2 can be installed directly; previous Support Package are not required beforehand. Microsoft Visual C++ 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package (x86) SAP BusinessObjects Extended Analytics Analyzer 7.5 SP5 Upgrade. The Support Package 5 can be installed directly; previous Support Package are not required beforehand. SAP BusinessObjects Extended Analytics licenses are included with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation at no additional cost SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 Client SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5 ODBO Client EPM Connector Optionally, install SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Data Grid.

Figure 786: Xcelsius - Security

598


2010

BPC430


Figure 787: Xcelsius - transporting models

When an Xcelsius® model is embedded with BPC Office or BPC Web, transport is supported. Once the SWF Flash file is transported as a document across the landscape, it uses the hostname of the target system. The limitation to this being that, transport cannot be done with Xcelsius® models that connect to data outside the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation system, since the hostname there cannot be transformed for transport. It is recommended to build the Xcelsius® model and then publish the SWF Flash file. It is not recommended to transport the Xcelsius® design model (XLF).

2010


599


600

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Exercise 16: Xcelsius - Reading Live Data Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Set up a dashboard to read live data in Xcelsius.

Business Example You have users who need to view live data from SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation in Xcelsius.

Task 1: Enter data in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Let's start out by creating a new dataset in Excel. 1.

Using your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application, create a new dataset that we will later view from an Xcelsius dashboard.

Result Now we have data to view in Xcelsius.

Task 2: Creating the Design Time Connection 1.

Open up Xcelsius, check your preferences, build the design time connections.

Task 3: Configure the Xcelsius Analyzer Report Now we'll set up the Analyzer. This is used to read live data at design time in Xcelsius. 1.

In the Excel window, embed an Xcelsius report.

Task 4: Create a Line Chart Dashboard Let's add a line chart to better analyze trends. 1.

Task 5: Create the BPC Data Grid Let's create an Xcelsius table based on BPC data. 1.

Insert the report definition in the Excel sheet and then configure the Data Grid. Continued on next page

2010


601


BPC430

Task 6: Create the EPM Run Time Connector The design time connection already exists, now we need to create the run time connection. 1.

Task 7: Create Flash File Create a flash file and then launch it from Internet Explorer and test the refresh feature. 1.

602


2010

BPC430


Solution 16: Xcelsius - Reading Live Data Task 1: Enter data in SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation Let's start out by creating a new dataset in Excel. 1.

Using your BPC430_## Appset and SALES Application, create a new dataset that we will later view from an Xcelsius dashboard. a)

In the Excel Interface, set your current view:

Figure 788: Xcelsius - CV

b)

Data Input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Ok.

c)

For the first 3 accounts → Enter the 2009.JAN data as you see below → Increment Feb-Dec by 10% each month → Send data → Send active workbook → Yes → Close → Exit the Excel Interface. Hint: Use a formula of '=K49*1.1' in L49 and then copy it to all 3 accounts for all 11 months.


2010


603


BPC430

Figure 789: Input Schedule

Result Now we have data to view in Xcelsius.

Task 2: Creating the Design Time Connection 1.

Open up Xcelsius, check your preferences, build the design time connections. a)

Access Xcelsius from you remote desktop: Start → Programs → Xcelsius → Xcelsius 2008 → When the interface opens → Pull the Excel window up so the ribbon appears as shown below:

Figure 790: Xcelsius - The Interface


604


2010

BPC430


b)

Turn on the 'Live Office' feature: Goto File → Preferences → Excel options → Check the Enable box:

Figure 791: Xcelsius - Preferences

c)

Select Ok → Save and Exit (we need to reload) → No (do not save the untitled file).

d)

Open up Xcelsius again: Start → Programs → Xcelsius → Xcelsius 2008.

e)

Confirm that you have the EPM Connector add on: File → Manage add ons:

Figure 792: Xcelsius - Add ons

f)

Close.

Task 3: Configure the Xcelsius Analyzer Report Now we'll set up the Analyzer. This is used to read live data at design time in Xcelsius. 1.

In the Excel window, embed an Xcelsius report. a)

Select cell A1 → Select the 'Analyzer' tab → New Report:


2010


605


BPC430

Figure 793: Xcelsius - Adding a new report

b)

Add new → Select 'SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation'

Figure 794: Xcelsius - Select OLAP Provider


606


2010

BPC430


c)

Select 'Connect' → Enter the credentials as shown below by copying from the C Drive BPC430_## folder 'XCELSIUS META DATA' file: Note: Use the xxxx server number provided by your instructor on the first day of class and you can see it on the top middle area of your screen. Your CPM-## password is lower case 'training'.

Figure 795: Xcelsius - Credentials

d)

Select Next → Select your Appset:

Figure 796: Xcelsius - Select the Appset

e)

Next → Select your Application: Continued on next page

2010


607


BPC430

Figure 797: Xcelsius - Select the Application

f)

Select Ok twice → Now you can see the Report Manager with the dimensions from your SALES Application:

Figure 798: Xcelsius - Report Manager


608


2010

BPC430


g)

To build your report, we will drag the dimensions into the Analyzer and double click to do the filters: Drag CATEGORY.H1 into the header → Double click → Restrict it to FLASH →Ok → Repeat this process to produce the completed header as shown below:

Figure 799: Xcelsius - Header Complete

h)

Set up the rows: Drag P_Acct.H1 into the rows → Double click → Select the accounts as shown:

Figure 800: Xcelsius - Accounts in rows

i)

Set up the columns: Drag Time.H1 into the columns → Double click → Select the months as shown:


2010


609


BPC430

Figure 801: Xcelsius - Time in Columns

j)

This is the report manager with a header, row, and column complete:

Figure 802: Xcelsius - Manager Complete

k)

To see the MDX generated: Select 'Display MDX' on the lower left:


610


2010

BPC430


Figure 803: Xcelsius - MDX

l)

Select close → Ok → Look in the Excel window to see your data! Caution: Make sure the dimensions and accounts are in the same rows as you see below.

Figure 804: Xcelsius - Report Manager Result


2010


611


m)

BPC430

Save your report: Select File → Save as → My Computer → C Drive → BPC430 → Analyzer Report ## → Save.

Task 4: Create a Line Chart Dashboard Let's add a line chart to better analyze trends. 1. a)

Drag the Line Chart component on to your canvas: On the upper left in Components → Category → Select Charts:

Figure 805: Xcelsius - Line chart component

b)

Drag the line chart on to the canvas → Position as follows:


612


2010

BPC430


Figure 806: Xcelsius - Line Chart Positioned

c)

With the chart selected → You can see the properties on the right → Select 'By Series':

Figure 807: Xcelsius - Chart Properties ('by series' should be selected)


2010


613


d)

BPC430

Series 1 will be the CE0004010 account: Select the '+' above 'Category Labels(X): → For the Name field → Use the 'selection icon' → A9 → Ok → For the Values(Y) → Selection Icon → B9:M9:

Figure 808: Xcelsius - Series 1

e)


f)


g)

Select quickviews → Show Canvas only: Hint: You can shrink the horizontal axis so the month values show as 1 2 3 ... by selecting the chart properties: Appearance → Text tab → Horizontal axis labels → Set a font of 10.


614


2010

BPC430


Figure 809: Xcelsius - Quick view

h)

Quickviews → Show my Workspace.

Task 5: Create the BPC Data Grid Let's create an Xcelsius table based on BPC data. 1.

Insert the report definition in the Excel sheet and then configure the Data Grid. a)

In order to pull data from BPC into the data grid, we will need to reference the report definition: In A14 → Excel Insert function → Select category IdPrj.Analyzerfuncs → GetReportDefinition:


2010


615


BPC430

Figure 810: Xcelsius - Get Report Definition

b)

Select Ok → On the upper left → Under Category → Favorites → Add ons → Drag the BPC Data Grid on to the canvas under the chart:


616


2010

BPC430


Figure 811: Xcelsius - Data Grid

c)

With the grid still selected, you can see its properties on the right:

Figure 812: Xcelsius - Grid Properties

d)

Set up the grid header property: Use the selection icon to pick A8:M8 → Ok.

e)

Set up the 'Row properties: 'detail data' property: Use the selection icon to pick A9:M11→ Ok.

f)

Hide empty rows → Your grid properties should look like this:


2010


617


BPC430

Figure 813: Xcelsius - Grid properties completed

g)

Your chart and table should look like this:


618


2010

BPC430


Figure 814: Xcelsius - Grid Result

h)

Save your Analyzer Report ##.

Task 6: Create the EPM Run Time Connector The design time connection already exists, now we need to create the run time connection. 1. a)

Goto Data → Connections → Add → EPM Connector → Name the connection: 'Run Time Connection 1' → Select EPM Application: Planning and Consolidation Version for NetWeaver → Select operation type: Retrieve data using Analyzer report → Enter host name: http://twdf####:1080 (copy from the xcelsius metadata file) → Connect → Copy the ADTWDFVM200\CPM-## user from the xcelsius metadata file→ Password is training → Select 'Ok' → The data source should populate as shown below:


2010


619


BPC430

Figure 815: Xcelsius - Run time connection

b)

Select A14 for the report definition. Note: Instead of 1552 in the host name above, use the # on the top middle of your screen.

c)

Add a refresh button to access the latest data from BPC: Close → Goto Category → Web Connectivity → Left click on the item 'URL Button' → Down arrow → Find 'Connection Refresh Button':


620


2010

BPC430


Figure 816: Xcelsius - Find refresh buton

d)

Drag the refresh button as shown:


2010


621


BPC430

Figure 817: Xcelsius - Position refresh button

e)

On the right → In the properties → Select the Name checkbox:


622


2010

BPC430


Figure 818: Xcelsius - Refresh property

f)

Select Save.


2010


623


BPC430

Task 7: Create Flash File Create a flash file and then launch it from Internet Explorer and test the refresh feature. 1. a)

Before we export the flash file, we'll delete the data so as to demonstrate the refresh capability: Delete the data in B8:M10 → File → Export → Flash(SWF) → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Flash ## → Save.

b)

Close your Xcelsius session.

c)

Switch the flash file property to open via Internet Explorer: Goto Start → Documents → My documents → Desktop → Flash ## → Right click → Properties → Change → Internet Explorer → Ok → Ok → Right click → Open → Ok → Right click on the security warning → Allow blocked content → Yes

d)

Refresh → Log on with the user: ADTWDFVM2001\CPM-## → Password: training → It may take a moment for the data to appear → Voila!

Figure 819: Xcelsius - Read live data: Initial

624


2010

BPC430


Exercise 17: Optional: Xcelsius - Writing Live Data Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Embed BPC data into an Xcelsius tab page. • Use the EPM connector to access Appsets and Applications for an Xcelsius planning interface. • View BPC messages in an Xcelsius dashboard. • Launch an Xcelsius flash file from the Excel Interface. • Create a connector to send data back to an Application.

Business Example Your company is implementing SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation and the business users want to use an Xcelsius dashboard to read and write data to the Applications. Use a tab set with one tab for the appset and application selections and another tab to carry out planning.

Task 1: Set up the Selections Tab Page Use Xcelsius components and connectors to access Appsets, Applications, and Current View. 1.

Open up Xcelsius, create a tab set and configure it with objects and connectors to work with BPC data as you can see from this finished result: Note: The 3 boxes on the lower right are for system messages.


2010


625


BPC430

Figure 820: Xcelsius Read/Write: The Selection Tab

2.

Configure the components in the selection tab.


626


2010

BPC430


Task 2: Set up the Planning Tab Page Configure the planning tab page. Here's what the finished result will look like:


1.

Add a document to your BPC Content Libary. It will be accessed by dashboard users to view planning data (for example).

2.

Create the planning components tab as you see below using the following instructions:

Task 3: Launch Xcelsius Flash Files from the Excel Interface 1.

Create a flash file and launch it from the Excel Interface. The idea of this lab is to show how to embed dashboards into your workbooks. Also, a business user can plan in an input schedule and view the results in their dashboard to do more analysis.

Result Now you know how to set up an Xcelsius dashboard for reading and writing BPC data.

2010


627


BPC430

Solution 17: Optional: Xcelsius - Writing Live Data Task 1: Set up the Selections Tab Page Use Xcelsius components and connectors to access Appsets, Applications, and Current View. 1.

Open up Xcelsius, create a tab set and configure it with objects and connectors to work with BPC data as you can see from this finished result: Note: The 3 boxes on the lower right are for system messages.

Figure 822: Xcelsius Read/Write: The Selection Tab

a)

Open Xcelsius: Goto Start → Programs → Xcelsius → Xcelsius 2008 → Locate the Tab Set on the upper left:


628


2010

BPC430


Figure 823: Xcelsius Read/Write: Tab Set

b)

Drag the tab set onto the canvas and position it as shown:

Figure 824: Xcelsius Read/Write: Tab set positioned


2010


629


c)

BPC430

Add the Selection and Planning tabs: Select '+' → Enter Selections → Ok → Select '+' → Enter Planning → Ok → Select Tab 1 → Use the '-' to delete it:

Figure 825: Xcelsius Read/Write: Tabs

d)

Populate the Selections tab with the following components: Goto Components → List → Drag the following components into the selections tab: Component

Number

List view

1

Combo Box

2

Connection Refresh Button

3

Input Text

3


630


2010

BPC430


Figure 826: Xcelsius Read/Write: Tab set components

e)

Use a background component for the selection tab to make it 'stand out': Components → List → Background → Drag on to the Selection tab canvas → Resize it to cover the entire selection tab →Select 'Send to Back'

Figure 827: Xcelsius Read/Write: Set background to 'back'

f)

View the object browser: Select 'Object Browser' on the upper left (it may already be open on the lower left) → Your components are linked to canvas 2 (Tab1 was canvas 1): Note: You can right click on the components to see the options.


2010


631


BPC430

Figure 828: Xcelsius Read/Write: Object browser

g)

In order to access Appsets, we will need to set up an 'EPM Connector' for Appsets: Select Data → Connections → Add → EPM Connections → To the right of 'Connection: → Enter a name of 'Display Appsets' → Choose the EPM Application and Operation type as you see below → Copy in the Host name from the 'Xcelsius MetaData' file on the C Drive BPC430 folder →Replace the XXXX with your server → 'Connect' → If prompted enter user: ADTWDFVM2001\CPM-## → Password: training:


632


2010

BPC430


Figure 829: Xcelsius Read/Write: Display Appset Connector

h)

Identify where the list of appsets will be output in the workbook and where messages are assigned in the workbook (and later rendered in the dashboard): in the Output section → 'Insert in' → Left clcik the selector button → Assign column A & B → Ok → Ok → for 'Message in' → Left click the selector button → Assign C6:

Figure 830: Xcelsius Read/Write: Appset connector / output assignments


2010


633


i)

BPC430

Close the data manager, in the Excel workbook, set up the Selection and Planning sheets: Name the first sheet 'Selections' → Create a second sheet → Name it 'Planning' → Return to the selection sheet:

Figure 831: Xcelsius Read/Write: Excel sheets

Note: The excel sheet is being used behind the scenes to deliver the metadata to the dashboard. As the user refreshes appsets for example, the spreadsheet is used to select the applications for that appset. The users current view will also be read based on the appset and application selected and referenced in the excel sheet. In addition, the user will select currency and category in the dashboard based on linkages in the excel sheet. j)

Use formatting to help identify the interaction between the connectors and the Xcelsius components. The Appset selected will be used to determine the appropriate applications, then the application along with the appset will be used to determine the relevant current view. Format columns A:B with a fill of yellow → Enter 'Appsets' in D1 → Format D1 as yellow → Format C6 and D6 with a fill of Light brown → Enter 'Appset Messages'in D6.

k)

Add the application connector: Data → Connection → Add → EPM connection → Left click 'Connection 1' → Enter description of 'Display Applications' → Choose the EPM Application and Operation type as you see below → Input a Host name → 'Connect' →For Application Set → Assign C2 → For Insert In: E:F → For Message In: C7: Continued on next page

634


2010

BPC430


Figure 832: Xcelsius Read/Write: Display application parameter

Note: Ignore any messages regarding server connections. l)

Close → Format columns E:F with a fill of orange → Format C2/D2 a fill of orange → Enter 'Applicaitons' in D2 → Fill C7 and D7 with light brown → Enter 'Application messages' in D7:

m)

Now we'll add a 3rd connector for the current view: Data → Connection → Add → EPM connection → Left click 'Connection 1' → Enter description of 'Display Current View' → Choose the EPM Application and Operation type as you see below → Input a Host name → 'Connect' → For Application Set → Assign C2 → For the Application → Assign C3 →For Insert In: G:H → For Message In: C8: Note: Ignore message 'cannot connect to server'.


2010


635


BPC430

Figure 833: Xcelsius Read/Write: Current view connector

n)

Close → Format columns G:H with a fill of light blue→ Format C3/D3 a fill of light blue → Enter 'Current View' in D3 → Fill C8 and D8 with medium brown → Enter 'Current View' in D8 → Select 'Quick Views' → Show spreadsheet only:

Figure 834: Xcelsius Read/Write: Spreadsheet quick view

o) 2.

Select 'Quick Views' → Show my workspace → File → Save as →C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Write Dashboard ## → Save.

Configure the components in the selection tab. Continued on next page

636


2010

BPC430


a)

Set up the 1st combo box for Appsets: Select the combo box on the left (it should appear as 'Label 1') → On the upper right → Open its properties by selecting the 'combo box 1' tab (unless the properties are already open) → Enter Title of 'AppSets' → For labels → Use the selector box to assign column A → For Insertion Type → Select 'Value' → Select column A for the 'Source Data → Select C2 as the 'Destination'

Figure 835: Xcelsius Read/Write: Appset combo box

b)

Set up the 2nd combo box: Select the combo box on the right (it should appear as 'Label 2') → On the upper right → Open its properties by selecting the 'combo box 2' tab→ Enter Title of 'Applications' → For labels → Use the selector box to assign column E → For Data Insertion → Select 'Value' as the insertion type → Select column E for the 'Source Data → Select C3 as the 'Destination'


2010


637


BPC430

Figure 836: Xcelsius Read/Write: Application combo box

c)

When these 'drop down' boxes are used we want their output to fall on top of the current view box: Select each combo box → Select 'Bring to front':

Figure 837: Xcelsius Read/Write: Bring combo boxes to front

d)

Set up the list view: Select the list view (table) → On the upper right → Open its properties by selecting the 'list view 1' tab→ Enter Title of 'Current view' → For 'display data'→ Use the selector box to assign columns G:H:


638


2010

BPC430


Figure 838: Xcelsius Read/Write: List view properties

e)

Change the list view column widths: In the properties for the list view → Appearance → Custom column width → Select the 'pencil' icon → Set column one to 150 pixels:

Figure 839: Xcelsius Read/Write: List view column widths

f)

Set up the appset refresh button: Select the top refresh button → Open its properties by selecting the 'connection refresh button 1' tab→ Enter Title of 'Refresh Appsets' → Select the Display Appset connection:


2010


639


BPC430

Figure 840: Xcelsius Read/Write: Refresh appset properties

g)

Set up the application refresh button: Select the second refresh button → Open its properties by selecting the 'connection refresh button 2' tab→ Enter Title of 'Refresh Application' → Select the Display Application connection:

Figure 841: Xcelsius Read/Write: Refresh application properties


640


2010

BPC430


h)

Set up the current view refresh button: Select the third refresh button → Open its properties by selecting the 'connection refresh button 3' tab→ Enter Title of 'Refresh Current View' → Select the Display current view connection:

Figure 842: Xcelsius Read/Write: Refresh current view properties

i)

Here's what your refresh icons should look like:

Figure 843: Xcelsius Read/Write: The refresh buttons


2010


641


j)

BPC430

Set up the 1st input text component for appset messges: Select the 1 input text item → On the upper right → Open its properties by selecting the 'input text ' tab→ Link to cell → Use the selector box to assign C6:

Figure 844: Xcelsius Read/Write: 1st input text prop

k)

Configure the next two input text components: Assign C7 to the 2nd input text (for application messges) → Assign C8 to the 3rd input text(for current view messages). Note: As a friendly reminder of how this dashboard will be used: The business user will select their appset and application, display their current view in the selection tab and then carry out planning activities on the second tab. Hint: For the logon coming up in the next step, use the xcelsius metadata file on the c drive bpc430 folder to cut and paste.

l)

Save → Select Preview → Select Refresh Appset → Enter user: ADTWDFVM2001\CPM-## → Password: training → Select your BPC430_## appset → Refresh Applications → Select SALES → Refresh current view:


642


2010

BPC430


Figure 845: Xcelsius Read/Write: Selection tab preview

m)

The dashboard at this point is displaying the user's BPC current view: Open up the BPC Web Interface → Minimize your Xcelsius session → From the admin console → Available interfaces → Interface for the Web → Set category to ACTBUD: Note: Leave this session open.

Figure 846: Xcelsius Read/Write: BPC Web current view


2010


643


n)

BPC430

In the dashboard: Refresh current view:

Figure 847: Xcelsius Read/Write: Updated dashboard current view

o)

Select 'Preview' to go back to the dashboard builder.


644


2010

BPC430


Task 2: Set up the Planning Tab Page Configure the planning tab page. Here's what the finished result will look like:


1.

Add a document to your BPC Content Libary. It will be accessed by dashboard users to view planning data (for example). a)

2.

We'll use the 'label' component to allow dashboard users to display a document from the BPC content library. Let's go import the document: In the BPC Web Interface → In your BPC430 appset → SALES application → Content Library → Post a document → Browse → My computer → C Drive → BPC7.5 → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Select 'Pet Deport sales data.xlt' → Continue → 'Select Users or Teams' → Check All users → Continue → Document type1 → Subtype document → Continue → Do not send an email → Continue → SALES Application → Continue with the checkmark.

Create the planning components tab as you see below using the following instructions: a)

In Xcelsius: Goto the planning tab → Select the Planning excel sheet → Pull the excel window up to display ribbon → Analyzer → New report → Add new... → SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation → Connect → Enter your credentials as shown: Continued on next page

2010


645


BPC430

Figure 849: Xcelsius Read/Write: Planning report credentials for plan tab

Hint: Use the Xcelsius metadata file on the c drive bpc430 folder to copy your credentials. b)

Next → Appset BPC430_## → Finish → Application SALES → Name the datasource as shown below:


646


2010

BPC430


Figure 850: Xcelsius Read/Write: Planning datasource for plan tab

c)

Ok (twice) → Now you see the initial Analyzer report manager:

Figure 851: Xcelsius Read/Write: Report manager for plan tab

d)

Build the report as you see below: Continued on next page

2010


647


BPC430

Figure 852: Xcelsius Read/Write: Competed report for plan tab

e)

Select Ok to run the report: (you values my vary)


648


2010

BPC430


Figure 853: Xcelsius Read/Write: Plan tab completed report

Caution: If your rows don't match up with the one above, you may need to delete a row or two. f)

Insert the report definition: In O1 → Insert function → Select category → Idprj.analyzerfuncs → Getreportdefinition → Ok → File → Save.

g)

Drop the components listed in the table below into the Planning tab (as shown in the figure below, it may appear on the next page): Component

Num- How they appear in canvas ber

Combo Box

2

Label #

Connection Refresh Button

3

Refresh

Grid

1

Table with fake numbers

Label

1

Label Text

Value

2

Boxes with 0

Line chart

1

Line Chart with fake data Continued on next page

2010


649


h)

BPC430

Quick views → Show canvas only → Position as shown below: Note: The label text may work better if its width is as wide as the canvas.

Figure 854: Xcelsius Read/Write: Planning tab layout

i)

Quick views → Show my workspace → File → Save.

j)

Set up the line chart: Left click the chart → Goto its properties on the upper right → Delete the subtitle → Set up the data area in PLANNING A8:D11:

Figure 855: Xcelsius Read/Write: Plan tab chart properties (should be A8:D11)


650


2010

BPC430


k)

Set up a connector to retrieve data: Data → Connections → Add → EPM Connector → Select Connection 1 → Configure the connection data as follows:

Figure 856: Xcelsius Read/Write: Read connection for plan tab

l)

Assign the excel cells for the report definition and output: Note: Report Def: O1, Insert in and Message in: A8:D11

Figure 857: Xcelsius Read/Write: Report definition and output cell assignments / read connection for plan tab (should be: A8:D11)


2010


651


m)

BPC430

Set up the connection page header: Select the page header bar → Use the selector button to Assign category to columns DT:DU → Assign Rptcurrency to DR:DS:

Figure 858: Xcelsius Read/Write: Header cell assignments / read connection for plan tab

n)

Format the excel sheet: Select close → Format DR:DS yellow → DT:DU orange → DQ1 yellow → Enter 'RptCurrency' in DQ1 → DQ2 orange and enter 'Category'.

o)

Set up a connector to send data: Data → Connections → Add → EPM Connector → Select Connection 1 → Configure the connection data as follows:


652


2010

BPC430


Figure 859: Xcelsius Read/Write: Write connection input for plan tab (O1)

p)

Assign the excel cells for the output:

Figure 860: Xcelsius Read/Write: Write connection output for plan tab

q)

Format and label the excel sheet: Select close → Format DV1 light blue→ DW1 light green→ DQ3 light blue and Enter 'Messages' → DQ4 light green and enter 'Rejected records'.


2010


653


r)

BPC430

Set up a connector to display text documents from the content library: Data → Connections → Add → EPM Connector → Select Connection 1 → Configure the connection data as follows: (The appset for you will be bpc430_##)

Figure 861: Xcelsius Read/Write: Text doc connection for plan tab

Hint: You may need to use the Connect button once or twice for the file to appear. s)

Assign the excel cells for the output: For output → Insert in → Assign DX1 → Close.

t)

Format and label the excel sheet: Select close → Format DX1 and DQ5 light grey→ In DQ5 → Enter 'Label Text File' → Quick views → Show spreadsheet only:


654


2010

BPC430


Figure 862: Xcelsius Read/Write: DQ:DU Fomatting for plan tab

u)

Quick views → Show my workspace only → File → Save.

v)

Set up the properties of the 1st combo box (for currency) as follows: Note: Labels: DR column, Source data: DR:DS columns, Destination: A5:B5.


2010


655


BPC430

Figure 863: Xcelsius Read/Write: 1st combo box / currency for plan tab

Hint: It's ok to overwrite existing values. w)

Set up the properties of the 2nd combo box as follows: Note: Labels: DT column, Source data: DT:DU columns, Desination: A1:B1.

Figure 864: Xcelsius Read/Write: 2nd combo box / category for plan tab

x)

Select each combo box and bring them to the 'front' so that their drop downs go on top of the grid:


656


2010

BPC430


Figure 865: Xcelsius Read/Write: Combo boxes to 'front' for plan tab

y)

Set up the properties of the 3 refresh buttons: Select the first refresh → In its properties → Enter 'Refresh Table' → Select 'Query from analyzer'→ 2nd refresh 'Send Data' and select 'Send data'→ 3rd refresh button 'Text From Content Library' → File → Save → This is what your planning tab should look like:

Figure 866: Xcelsius Read/Write: Plan tab refresh buttons

z)

Set up the grid properties:


2010


657


BPC430

Figure 867: Xcelsius Read/Write: Grid properties for plan tab

aa) Set up the label text properties: Link to cell → Assign DX:

Figure 868: Text label properties for plan tab

Hint: This item will not be visible after you configure it (in build mode).


658


2010

BPC430


ab) Set up the 1st value component: Select the 1st box with the '0' → Enter title 'Message' → Data → Assign DV1. ac) Set up the 2nd value component: Select the 2nd box with the '0' → Enter title 'Rejected Records' → Data → Assign DW1 → File → Save → This is what you should see:

Figure 869: Xcelsius Read/Write: Plan tab complete

ad) Let's take it for a text run! Preview → Use the refresh buttons to do your selections:


2010


659


BPC430

Figure 870: Xcelsius Read/Write: Preview selection tab

ae) On the planning tab: Refresh table → Select the EUR and ACTBUD → Refresh table →You will not have any data → Select FLASH → Refresh table →Voila!

Figure 871: Xcelsius Read/Write: Preview plan tab


660


2010

BPC430


af)

Test the data send: Single left click on account CE0004010 and Jan → Enter 1200 → Send data:

Figure 872: Xcelsius Read/Write: Send data in plan tab

ag) Text the text file: Select 'Text from Content Library' → You should see the contents of the txt file near the bottom of the dashboard → You should be able to scroll through the records. Switch off preview mode when you are done.


2010


661


BPC430

Figure 873: Xcelsius Read/Write: Preview text data on plan tab

Hint: You could also use this feature as a way to provide bulletins or planning assumptions such as inflation rates to the planners. Note: You may need to adjust the position, height and width of the refresh buttons and the text component.

Task 3: Launch Xcelsius Flash Files from the Excel Interface 1.

Create a flash file and launch it from the Excel Interface. The idea of this lab is to show how to embed dashboards into your workbooks. Also, a business user can plan in an input schedule and view the results in their dashboard to do more analysis. a)

In Xcelsius: Goto File → Export → Flash (swf) → C Drive → BPC430 → Enter 'Read Write ##' → Save → Close Xcelsius.

b)

In the Excel Interface for the BPC430 Appset and SALES Application: Reporting and Analysis → Open a blank workbook → Insert Dashboard → On the planning tab → Refresh table → Log in.


662


2010

BPC430


c)

Change the data in an input template and refresh it into the dashboard: Home → Data input → Build a schedule using a dynamic template → Account Trend → Ok. → use the current view below → Enter the data as shown and send it:

Figure 874: Xcelsius Read/Write: Input Schedule and current view for plan tab test

d)

Refresh the table on the planning tab:


2010


663


BPC430

Figure 875: Xcelsius Read/Write: Updated planning tab

Result Now you know how to set up an Xcelsius dashboard for reading and writing BPC data.

664


2010

BPC430


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a dashboard where you can read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data. • Use the connectors for SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data and metadata.

2010


665

Unit Summary

BPC430

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create a dashboard where you can read and write SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data. • Use the connectors for SAP BusinessObjects Planning & Consolidation data and metadata.

666


2010

Unit Summary

667

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

668

BPC430


2010

Unit 9 Word and Powerpoint Integration Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • •

Understand the Interface for Word tasks Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file Understand the Interface for PowerPoint tasks Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file.

Unit Contents Lesson: The Interface for Word and PowerPoint ............................... 670 Exercise 18: Optional: Word and Powerpoint .............................. 677

2010


669

Unit 9: Word and Powerpoint Integration

BPC430

Lesson: The Interface for Word and PowerPoint Lesson Overview Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Understand the Interface for Word tasks Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file Understand the Interface for PowerPoint tasks Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file.

Business Example The users you support have a need to render live data into Word and Powerpoint. Note: One of the new features in 7.5 is that users with the appropriate security can save word and powerpoint files to the server.

670


2010

BPC430

2010

Lesson: The Interface for Word and PowerPoint


671


BPC430

Figure 876: BPC for Word and PowerPoint

•

Insert BPC data Allows you to insert a value from the database based on the current view. Clicking this link inserts a placeholder. Select Retrieve all data to get the value.

•

Insert BPC for Excel object You can insert a SAP Business Planning and Consolidation report or input schedule into a Microsoft Word document or Microsoft PowerPoint slide. The report or input schedule you want to embed must be saved on the BPC server.

•

Add new comment and View comments tasks use the standard Comment interface to submit and report on comments. Note: The system refreshes only embedded objects based on the current view. The individual objects are static at the time of the insert.

•

Retrieve all data Allows you to retrieve data values, based on the current view, from the database. Clicking this link refreshes data values in the entire document or slideshow.

•

Expand All Allows you to expand functions contained in embedded SAP Business Planning and Consolidation objects.

•

Send all data After at least one data value has been inserted in your document or slideshow, you can use this command to send the value to the database. If there are multiple inserted data values, this command sends all of them to the database.

672


2010

BPC430


Figure 877: Insert interface for Excel object in Word

This slides discusses editing object properties with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for a BPC for Word object. The Send All Data task is not relevant when you use the Insert BPC data option, which is a read only intersection. This slide describes how to insert a BPC for Excel object. The Send All Data task is relevant only when you use Insert BPC for Excel Object and you must embed an input schedule. This is not relevant when you use the Insert BPC data option, which is a read only intersection. Note: If you need more advanced formatting, you should use the “Insert BPC for Excel Object”.

2010


673


BPC430

Figure 878: Insert BPC Data within PowerPoint 1/2

This slide goes over how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint slide.

Figure 879: Insert BPC Data within PowerPoint 2/2

This slides discusses editing object properties with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) for use with BPC for PowerPoint. The Send All Data task is not relevant when you use the Insert BPC data option which is a read only intersection.

674


2010

BPC430


Figure 880: BPC for Excel Object within PowerPoint

This slide shows an example of a BPC for Excel Object within a Microsoft PowerPoint file. The Send All Data task is relevant only when you use Insert BPC for Excel Object. You must embed an input schedule. This is not relevant when you use the Insert BPC data option which is a read only intersection. Note: If you need more advanced formatting, you should use the Insert BPC for Excel Object.

Figure 881: Office Integration Tips

2010


675


BPC430

Insert Dashboard Allows you to embed an Xcelsius SWF file into a Word document or PowerPoint presentation. The Xcelsius document is based on the current view. If you change the current view, the Xcelsius document is updated. If you embed an Xcelsius document in any other way through a Word or PowerPoint function, it is not based on the current view. Toggle Edit Mode (Word only): Allows you to resize an Xcelsius SWF file frame once it has been inserted into a Word document.

676


2010

BPC430


Exercise 18: Optional: Word and Powerpoint Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Set up and use templates that are embedded into Work and Powerpoint files. • Use data points in powerpoint documents. • Launch Xcelsius from Word and Powerpoint.

Business Example You have word and or powerpoint documents that you want to embed live Planning & Consolidation data into.

Task 1: Embed Dashboard into Word In this task, lets' take a look at embedding an Xcelsius dashboard into a Word document. 1.

Access the 'Interface for Word'

Task 2: Embed an Excel Template into Word In this task, lets' take a look at embedding an Excel template into a Word document so users can see live data. 1.

Embed an Excel object into a word document

Task 3: Powerpoint Let's insert a 'data point' into a ppt slide. 1.

2010

Access the Interface for Powerpoint.


677


BPC430

Solution 18: Optional: Word and Powerpoint Task 1: Embed Dashboard into Word In this task, lets' take a look at embedding an Xcelsius dashboard into a Word document. 1.

Access the 'Interface for Word' a)

From the Admin Console: Available interfaces → Interface for Word → Use the connection wizard with the same user and password you have been using → Go into the BPC430_## Appset and Sales Application →Take note of the options on the action pane:

Figure 882: Word: Action Pane

b)

Embed your flash file from earlier:Enter 'This is a word document:' → Hit enter. Insert dashboard → My computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Select your 'flash' file → Open:


678


2010

BPC430


Figure 883: Word: Open a dashboard into Word

c)

Select Edit toggle mode → Select the refresh button in the dashboard → Use the '+ on the lower right to increase the size:

Figure 884: Word: edit toggle mode (you will have data for all 12 months)


2010


679


d)

BPC430

Save your file to the server: On the lower right → Save → Company →Reports → 'Word doc with dashboard' → Save.

Task 2: Embed an Excel Template into Word In this task, lets' take a look at embedding an Excel template into a Word document so users can see live data. 1.

Embed an Excel object into a word document a)


Figure 885: Word: current view

b)

Create a new word doc: On the upper left → Office button → New → Blank document.

c)

Embed a template: Enter 'This is a BPC Excel Template:' → Hit Enter → Insert Interface for Excel Object → Company → Reports → Wizard → Template1 (account trend) → Open → Retrieve all data.

d)

Save your file to the server: On the lower right → Save → Company →Reports → 'Word doc with Excel' → Save.

Task 3: Powerpoint Let's insert a 'data point' into a ppt slide. 1.

Access the Interface for Powerpoint.


680


2010

BPC430


a)

From the Admin Console: Available interfaces → Interface for Powerpoint → Use the connection wizard with the same user and password you have been using → Go into the BPC430_## Appset and Sales Application →Take note of the options on the action pane:

b)


Figure 886: PPT current view

2010

c)

Open a ppt file from your folder: Office button → Open → My computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430_## → Pet Depot Financial Summary → Open.

d)

Close the pane on the left → Enter title of: 'BPC430 ##' → Page down to the second slide → Enter title 'Budget Actual Comparison'

e)

Select 'Insert data' → Right click on the data point to see the options:

f)

Right click on the data point → 'Osoft...' option → Edit → Increase the size → Move it to the intersection of EXTSALES and Actual.

g)

Change your current view to the category BUDGET.

h)

Insert data → Increase the size of the data point → Drag it to the intersection of EXTSALES and Budget.

i)

Save your file to the server: On the lower right → Save → Company →Reports → 'PPT with Data' → Save.


681


BPC430

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the Interface for Word tasks • Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file • Understand the Interface for PowerPoint tasks • Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file.

682


2010

BPC430

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the Interface for Word tasks • Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft Word file • Understand the Interface for PowerPoint tasks • Describe how to insert SAP Business Planning and Consolidation data into a Microsoft PowerPoint file.

2010


683

Unit Summary

684

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

685

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

686

BPC430


2010

Unit 10 Interface for the Web Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • •

Understand the features and functionality of the Content Library and of Live Reporting. Turn on and use audit reports. Use the system reports. Post document attachments to the content library. Create web pages.

Unit Contents Lesson: Interface for the Web..................................................... 688 Exercise 19: Web Reporting .................................................. 715

2010


687

Unit 10: Interface for the Web

BPC430

Lesson: Interface for the Web Lesson Overview In this lesson, we'll work with the thin client 'Live Reports', learn now to turn on and use the audit reporting, and we'll also take a look at the other system reports.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • • •

Understand the features and functionality of the Content Library and of Live Reporting. Turn on and use audit reports. Use the system reports. Post document attachments to the content library. Create web pages.

Business Example Your client is interested in a thin client solution for reading and writing data and so they are interested in Live Reports. Also, the governance risk and compliant group is very interested in the audit reports. And, there are several system reports that you may be able to use for questions regarding comments and security for example.

688


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Interface for the Web

Figure 887: Content Library Overview

Content Library is a repository for storing files that you want to share. • •

Valid file types include Word, HTML, Excel, PowerPoint, text (such as an email), Web pages and images. The list of file types is customizable in the BPC Web Administration. See next slide for parameter.

The Content Library can also be used for creating custom Web pages. The Content Library is accessed via the Web. • •

2010

The main Content Library page contains all the files that have been uploaded (that you have authorization to access). To open a file, you can click on the Title.


689


BPC430

Figure 888: Technical Considerations: Web Admin Parameters and Data Tables

The slide lists the relevant Web Admin parameters for the Content Library. SMTPAUTH: The authentication method of the SMTP server. (Required) 0 = Anonymous; 1 = Basic; 2 = NTLM . This setting does not change the method on the SMTP server, but must match the type of authentication enabled on it. Failure to set this appropriately can result in errors from the email server. SMTPPASSWORD: The password for the user name defined as the SMTPUSER (Required) SMTPPORT: Port number for your SMTP email server. Default is port 25, the default SMTP server port number. (Required) SMTPSERVER: The name or TCP/IP address of the SMTP email server the system uses to send email. (Required) SMTPUSER: The user name from which email from the system originates. (Required) ALLOWEXTENSIONS: Defines the file extensions the system permits users to upload to the application, data manager files, content library files, web ready files, and library files. When set to ALL, BPC allows all extensions. The default value is ALL. (Required)

690


2010

BPC430


ALLOW_FILE_SIZE: The maximum file size BPC permits users to upload. The default value is 100 MB. (Required) DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS: The file extensions BPC allows users to upload by default: .XLS, XLT, .DOC, .DOT, .PPT, .POT, .XML, .MHT, .MHTML, .HTM, .HTML, .XLSX, .XLSM, .XLSB, .ZIP, .PDF, .PPTX, .PPTM, .POTX, .POTM, .DOCX, .DOCM, .DOTX, .DOTM, .CDM, .TDM, .PNG, .GIF, .JPG, .CSS, .MRC.

Figure 889: Accessing the Content Library

The Content Library is located in the BPC Web interface. BPC Web can be accessed one of two ways: • •

2010

The URL http:///OSoft/Contents/WebContentsList.aspx Click on BPC_launch icon from the Launch Page.


691


BPC430

Figure 890: Content Library Document List

This slides lists the columns displayed in the Content Library Document List.

Figure 891: File Storage of posted documents to Content Library

Posted documents are also called uploaded documents to Content Library. They are stored in the File Service on the BW Application Server. The path is Webfolders → → Documents.

692


2010

BPC430


Also enterprise logos are stored here.

2010


693


BPC430

Figure 892: Post a New Document

• • • • • • • • • •

Step 1: Select “Post a document” from the action pane. Step 2: Click on Browse and select a file located on your PC you want to post to the Content Library. The file name must be a unique name. Step 3: You can change the description of the file which will then become the document title. Step 4: Click on users/teams to define who should have access to the posting. Step 5: Select the All Users checkbox or select individual teams and/or individual users. Step 6: Click on the green arrow to continue. Step 7: If applicable, select a predefined document type from the drop down list box. Step 8: If applicable, select a predefined document sub-type from the drop down list box, or define a new sub-type. Step 9: This step is optional. If you would like to send an e-mail to the users about the posting, refer to Step 10. Step 10: If needed, you can have the system automatically send an email to the users informing them of the new posting. You can create your own email message or click on the “User the default message” link to have the system create a generic email message. Then click on the green arrow to continue. Note: Only select “Yes, send an email” if you have installed the Email server. Otherwise you will get an error message. But despite the error message the document will be saved on the server.

•

• •

Step 11: If applicable, you can associate the posting to a particular application in the application set. From the Application drop down list box, select the associated application. Step 12: Application Context is NOT used to control security/access to the files in the Content Library. This is controlled by “Team Access” exclusively. Step 13: When you set an application context, the document can be controlled by Work Status settings (e.g. it can be locked down and prevented from future changes). You can not post a document to a specific region if it is currently locked by work status.

• •

694

Step 14: Click on the green check. Step 15: The document has been posted.


2010

BPC430


Figure 893: Editing Documents and Web Pages

For Documents that are already uploaded, the edits that you can perform are changes to the Title, Type, SubType, Application Context, and Team Access. For Web Pages, you can only change the Team Access field.

Figure 894: Opening Selected Items in Tabs

2010


695


BPC430

Multiple items can be opened in separate tabs. • • •

Place a checkmark in the box next to the Content Library List item titles. Click Open selected items in tabs link under the Library Content Options heading. The Multi-tab Content displays.

Figure 895: Sorting, Filtering and Deleting

You can click on the column heading to sort the results, and you can also choose the option “Sort this list” in the action pane. In the action pane, click “Filter this list” to reduce the number of documents being displayed. This will open the dialog box where you can apply your filters (partial text matches are support). The filters will be applied, and only matching documents will be displayed. You can also delete items once loaded by selecting the entries and choosing “Delete selected items” in the Action Pane.

696


2010

BPC430


Figure 896: Content Library and Work Status

Work Status locks can allow you to lock down documents that have had the Application Context specified. You can launch the work status locks page from Content Library using the Action Pane. You can then set the Work Status values. Note: If the data is moved to a Work State that has “DOCS” as “Locked”, then you will not be able to post add, change, or delete any new documents to Content Library, for the relevant Application Context.

2010


697


BPC430

Figure 897: Live Reporting

Live Reporting is the web-based reporting and data input option that provides the ability to create reports and input schedules for Business Planning and Consolidation. You can start from a blank page or edit an existing report or input schedule. You can create grids (that also support data input) and charts. You can submit data, add and view comments, refresh the report, and see report information. You can also set the work status. You can format reports and input schedules by setting a data scale, suppression options, header visibility, column width, and data format. Depending upon how the report is configured, some dimensions in the current view cannot be changed. For those dimensions, the values are specified in the report definition. The dimension values that are hard coded do not update the current view. The current view uses color coding to indicate the status as shown below: • •

Blue: a dimension that is in the rows, columns, and page keys of the report. Red: a dimension not included in the report definition that is acting only as a filter.

To access Live Reporting directly, go to http:///OSoft/WebReport/WebReportList.aspx. To access Live Reporting through BPC Web, select Live Reporting from the BPC Web page.

698


2010

BPC430


It is possible to modify a live report after it is saved.

Figure 898: Sample BPC Web Live Report & Chart

Charts in Live Reports You can create a chart from a live report or add a chart to a live report so that it displays on the same page. When you change the report in any way, the associated chart is also updated. You can display the live report and a chart side by side or only the chart alone. You can set the width and height of the chart, the type of chart (bar, column, line, point, pie, area), and whether it is 2D or 3D. You can display a legend for the chart and determine its location, alignment, font type, font size, and font color. You can remove a chart from a report by choosing the display option Report Only within the chart options on the Drag & Drop Options action pane. To display a chart in a live report, choose Chart options from the Drag & Drop Options action pane, which you can open by choosing Edit report using drag & drop from the View Report Options action pane. Then, specify appropriate reporting criteria. Format of Live Reports

2010


699


BPC430

You format live reports to determine their appearance concerning: • • • • •

Scaling numbers Suppressing rows and columns containing null values Displaying and hiding column and row headers Setting column width Defining the font type, size, and color of report data.

Figure 899: Data Input via the Web

It is not necessary to switch the mode of the Live Report to enable input, the only requirement is to resolve members to base level. You can do that by either changing the current view for dimensions not in the rows and columns and or by expanding dimensions already in the rows and columns.

700


2010

BPC430


Figure 900: Creating a Web Page 1/4

You can create a new Web page in the Content Library rather than uploading documents. Under the Content Library Options, click “Add a new web page” option. • •

In the “What is the new page name?” field, enter the page name. Select a template layout:

•

– No columns – Side by side – Small left side – Small right side Select from the available choices: – – – –

2010

Web-Ready File (files that were uploaded from Excel as Web-Ready files) A Live Report A specific Content Library Document or a List of Documents in the Content Library A Web Site (to be embedded in the page).


701


BPC430


Once objects have been added to the Content area (by Drag and Drop), the Action Pane will guide you through the appropriate settings for that object (in this example, a simple Web Site). You can select multiple items, and control the order in the page via the buttons at the bottom of the page.

702


2010

BPC430



Enter a name for the item that was posted and then specify a pixel height. In the case of a web-site, the only setting required is the name of the URL. You can continue adding more objects to the page, or you can select one of the following options: • • • •

2010

Modify the object. Set “Team Access” to the page. Preview the output. Save and view the output.


703


BPC430


Once the page is open, you can: • • • •

Add Comments View Comments Modify the contents of the page Delete the page Note: These settings apply to both Content Library Web Pages and Documents.

704


2010

BPC430


Figure 904: Content Library - Security

The following Content Library actions are controlled by Security Tasks: • • • • •

“Add a new web page”: ZFP→ CreateWebpage. “Post a document”: ZFP → ManageContentLib. “Edit page information in the list”: ZFP → ManageContentLib. “Delete selected items”: ZFP → ManageContentLib. “Set work status”: WorkStatus → SetWorkStatus AND it also requires that an application has been set in your Current View.

Figure 905: LANDINGPAGEITEM

2010


705


BPC430

There is an AppSet web admin parameter called “LANDINGPAGEITEM”, which allows you to control what is viewed when you open the BPC Web “Getting Started” page (landing.aspx). In SAP Business Planning and Consolidation 7.0NW the value expected for LANDINGPAGEITEM is the “ID” of the WebPage. Note: You can only use WebPages here (you can not link directly to a document).

Audit Reports

Figure 906: Audit Function

The Audit functionality in SAP Business Planning and Consolidation is intended to provide internal and external stakeholders enough information to monitor the system behavior and protect companies against fraud.

706


2010

BPC430


Audit is broken up into 2 categories: •

•

1. Activity Audit: Captures “metadata” changes, such as Add, Create, Change, and Delete – AppSets – Applications – Dimensions. – Activity audit is captured at the AppSet level. 2. Data Audit: Captures “transactional” data changes – i.e. capture information on changes to records in an Application. Data audit is captured at the Application level.

Figure 907: Overview Audit

Within Web Administration, it is possible to activate and deactivate Auditing. Since the data applies just to an Application, Data audit is captured at the Application level. Both audits can be activated in the WebAdmin Web page. The general activation is done per Application Level. More granular Audit-Modules can be activated per category.

2010


707


BPC430

Archiving of Audit data is scheduled via a process chain in Data Manager. The basic administration parameters are set in the WebAdmin environment Reporting of Audit data is possible via the system report framework of SAP Business Planning and Consolidation. Already archived records cannot be reported anymore within the system report framework. Nevertheless, they are still available in a Data Dictionary table in Business Intelligence (BI).

Figure 908: Audit Setup - Manage Activity Audit

Activity auditing allows you to track the administrative tasks performed in the system. Once activity is recorded, you can run a report that shows system activity, based on specified criteria. The report shows when the task was performed, and by whom. If enabled, BPC tracks activity for the following functional tasks: Application set and application setup, User and team setup.

708


2010

BPC430


To enable activity auditing 1. 2. 3.

Start BPC Administration, and from the Administration Configuration action pane, select Manage activity auditing. Select Enable Admin Activity to record all administrative activity, and select Enable user activity to record all end user activity. Click Update. “User Activity” includes:Set Work Status locks. Admin Activity includes: • • • •

Add/Modify/Delete/Copy operations for AppSets, Applications, and Dimensions (including Process Dimension) Security Changes (add/change/delete users, teams, and task/member profiles) Web Admin Changes (AppSet/Application parameters; Document Types/Subtypes; and Changing Activity or Data Audit settings) Validation rules changes.

Figure 909: Audit Setup - Manage Data Audit

You can set up data auditing to record an audit trail of BPC activity. You can set it up by application and category.

2010


709


BPC430

To manage audit data 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

Start BPC Administration, and select Manage data audit from the Administration Configuration action pane. From the Select Application field, select the application for which you want to set properties. Select Enable Data Activity to turn on auditing for the selected application. Click the View Audit Settings for All Categories link from the action pane to see a report that shows which categories and tasks are enabled for the selected application. Select a category, then select one or more tasks to audit. Select the Select All button to select all of the task check boxes, or select the Clear All button to clear all check boxes.

Scheduling of Audit-Saving not required. Audit records are written asynchronously to DB. This design was chosen to achieve the maximum performance. The Save Audit Data Now functionality is covered by the UPDATE button.

Figure 910: Display Failed Audit Logs

If an asynchronous update of the audit data fails, the user does not get any notification. This is mainly related to the fact, that the asynchronous write back was chosen. Usually, such an error should not happen.

710


2010

BPC430


To control the background audit jobs. Transaction SLG1 can be used. The relevant object would be UJ, Subobject UJU.

Figure 911: System reports - Activity Audit Report

The upper slide shows a typical report for Activity Audits. A practical approach should be considered when using the data audit due the potential amount of table space and possible system performance issues. Perhaps, it could best be used when your planning process is 'almost' over.

2010


711


BPC430

Figure 912: System reports - Audit Data

The upper slide shows a typical report for Data Audits.

Figure 913: How to archive Audit Data

The audit archiving functionality is scheduled via the Data Manager. Two process chains are delivered as an example how to setup archiving.

712


2010

BPC430


Figure 914: Appendix: Audit - Table Structure

This slide outlines the table schema of the audit functionality in SAP Business Planning and Consolidation.

2010


713


714

BPC430


2010

BPC430


Exercise 19: Web Reporting Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and use live reports. • Use the content library document attachment feature. • Create web pages. • Activate and use system reports.

Business Example You are interested in how you can use the 'thin client' to read or write data. You also have a need to use the content library to store document attachments. Objective: Create a report using the BPC Live Reporting feature. Description: With Live Reporting, you have the ability to create a report using drag & drop. You can start from a blank page, or edit an existing report or input schedule. You can switch the row/column dimensions easily, and add nested dimensions. This interface can be used for both read and write mode.

Task 1: Live Report and Web Page Let's take a look at the Live Reporting option. You can use live reports for both read and write. They are independent from Excel. 1.

Access the web interface, build a live report and render it in a web page.

Task 2: Content Library 1.

Now let's do some more work in the 'Content Library' with document attachments.

Task 3: System Reports 1.

2010

Now let's take a look at how to turn on and use the system reports.


715


BPC430

Solution 19: Web Reporting Task 1: Live Report and Web Page Let's take a look at the Live Reporting option. You can use live reports for both read and write. They are independent from Excel. 1.

Access the web interface, build a live report and render it in a web page. a)

From the Admin Console → Available Interfaces → Interface for the Web → Live reporting → Set your current view:

Figure 915: Live Reporting (LR) - Current view

b)

Select 'build a report using drag and drop' → drag p_acct into the rows:


716


2010

BPC430


Figure 916: LR - Account in rows

c)

On the right hand side → Scroll down and set the member options for p_acct:

Figure 917: LR - Select P_acct members


2010


717


d)

BPC430

Continue → Select 'base level only of selected':

Figure 918: LR - P_acct selector rule

e)

Continue → Leave 'ID' selected → Continue → Drag Time into the columns → Select both member options → Continue → Select 'base level only of selected' → Continue → Leave 'ID' selected → Continue:

Figure 919: LR - Time in columns


718


2010

BPC430


f)

Select 'Save Report':

Figure 920: LR - Save

g)

Continue → Select live reporting so you can see your new report in the list:

Figure 921: LR - Live report list

h)

Select your report → Enter in the values as shown below → Send data values → Yes:


2010


719


BPC430

Figure 922: LR - Sent data

i)

Now we need to create a web page for our new live report: Select 'Content Library' → Add a new web page → Enter a name as follows:

Figure 923: LR - Name web page

j)

Continue → Drag 'Live report file' into the page area:

Figure 924: LR - Web page with live report


720


2010

BPC430


k)

Input a title and select 400 pixels:

Figure 925: LR - Web page item title

l)

Select your live report (so it turns blue) → Continue → Set access to this web page → Select all users → Ok → Save and show me the finished web page:

Figure 926: LR - Web page with live report: result

Task 2: Content Library 1.

Now let's do some more work in the 'Content Library' with document attachments.


2010


721


a)

BPC430

Let's take a look at the existing document types and subtypes: Select 'Available Interfaces' → Administration:

Figure 927: DOC - Admin for the web

b)

Select 'manage document types':

Figure 928: DOC - Manage document types

c)

Select 'Manage document subtypes:


722


2010

BPC430


Figure 929: DOC - Manage document subtypes

d)

Goto ”Available Interfaces' → 'Interface for the Web' → 'Content Library':

Figure 930: DOC - Post a document

e)

Select 'post a document' → Browse → My computer → C Drive → BPC430 → BPC430-## → Actual trend analysis → Open → Continue → Select users or teams → All users → Ok → Continue → Select document 'type1' → Subtype 'document' → Continue → Do not send an email → Continue → Select SALES as the relevant application → Continue:


2010


723


BPC430

Figure 931: DOC - Content library list

f)

Select the 'actual trend analysis': Note: This is a word doc that has a BPC template embedded into it.

Figure 932: DOC - Actual trend analysis

Task 3: System Reports 1.

Now let's take a look at how to turn on and use the system reports. a)

In 'Available Interfaces' → Select 'Administration': Continued on next page

724


2010

BPC430


Figure 933: Sys Reports - Admin for the web

b)

Let's start collecting the audit data (actually, it was already on): Select 'manage activity audit' → Check off all four categories → Update:

Figure 934: Sys Reports - Manage activity audit

c)

Now let's go run some reports: In available interfaces → Goto the ”Interface for the Web' to see the 'launch system reports' option:


2010


725


BPC430

Figure 935: Sys Reports - Getting started

d)

'Launch system reports':

Figure 936: Sys Reports - Options

e)

Select 'audit activity report' → Continue:


726


2010

BPC430


Figure 937: Sys Reports - Audit activity report

f)

Goto 'getting started' → Launch system reports → Security reports:

Figure 938: Sys Reports - security reports

g)

Select 'By User':


2010


727


BPC430

Figure 939: Sys Reports - Security report by user

h)

Now we need to see how the data audit is turned on: In 'Available Interfaces' → Select 'Administration' → Manage data audit → Make your settings as you see below → Update:


728


2010

BPC430


Figure 940: Sys Reports - Manage data audit

i)

Data audit was previously turned on for the 'NovFcst' category so now all you need to do is view it: Goto Available interfaces → Interface for the Web → Launch system reports → Audit data report → Continue:


2010


729


BPC430

Figure 941: Sys Reports - Audit data report

730


2010

BPC430


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the features and functionality of the Content Library and of Live Reporting. • Turn on and use audit reports. • Use the system reports. • Post document attachments to the content library. • Create web pages.

2010


731

Unit Summary

BPC430

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the features and functionality of the Content Library and of Live Reporting. • Turn on and use audit reports. • Use the system reports. • Post document attachments to the content library. • Create web pages.

732


2010

Unit Summary

733

BPC430


2010

Unit Summary

734

BPC430


2010

Unit 11 Appendix Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: •

Discuss GRC Integration.

Unit Contents Lesson: Appendix: GRC ........................................................... 736

2010


735

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430

Lesson: Appendix: GRC Lesson Overview Governance, Risk and Compliance (GRC) Integration

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •

Discuss GRC Integration.

Business Example SOX compliance is a big concern for every business these days. Let's take a look at some of the functionality we have at our disposal. As a single solution for end-to-end enterprise control management, it increases confidence in the effectiveness of controls. It provides centralized control management for automated and manual controls and thus reduces cost without compromising compliance. It enables management by exception, prioritizes re-mediation activities and provides management insight into the control environment With any software, you need 'checks and balances'.

Figure 942: Process Control

736


2010

BPC430

Lesson: Appendix: GRC

The integration of the SAP Governance, Risk and Compliance (GRC) solutions with the Group Close solutions brings an intensive control and compliance solution for the group close process. During the data collection task for the consolidation process, the data collected from subsidiaries must be validated before further consolidation tasks are executed. The validation framework includes two parts: First, you execute the validation program against the entire subsidiary submission. This includes calculating the data against validation rules and putting the imbalances or validation errors into predefined validation error accounts. Secondly, you retrieve the result of validation using a validation report that shows the error amounts of validation accounts. You then review the report and validate error accounts in order to bring the amounts below the tolerance limits. You can now perform further consolidation tasks, such as currency conversion and eliminations.

Figure 943: End to End control

The SAP BusinessObjects Process Control interface enable auditors and internal controllers to manage control and compliance work. They perform these tasks in a central place for both automated and manual controls on the consolidation system. Here are listed typical questions that SAP BusinessObjects Process Control interface helps you to answer. In SAP BusinessObjects Process Control, you design and/or schedule the GRC monitoring process against consolidation data stored in the consolidation database. Customize automated test rule by setting query criteria on top of consolidation data through a BI (Business Intelligence) query on SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Schedule automated testing by creating a job that executes the query for SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation consolidation cube. View testing results by viewing a report or monitoring the job.

2010


737

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430

Figure 944: Testing Scenario 1

When is a test failure or with a rating other than adequate: Issues are generated and reported in the task owner’s Work Inbox. Remediation plans are associated with issues in SAP BusinessObjects Process Control. You can start the remediation process.


738


2010

BPC430


SAP BusinessObjects Process Control allows you to define test plans for compliance of the group close process. Test plans are manual or automated. The following are typical automated test plan scenarios that read transaction data from the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation InfoCube: Flag transactions over a threshold for a range of accounts. Validation imbalance is cleared. Balance Sheet is balanced. Investment is fully eliminated at subsidiary during consolidation. All balance sheet and Profit & Loss, Inter-company declarations are properly eliminated at consolidation level. Scope change is compiled with the accounting method change. The following are typical automated test plan scenarios that read metadata such as Work Status, Journals, Data Stored in tables on the application server and dynamic, from SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation : Given configuration remains in effect for a key control. Data work status are set correctly. Auditing the transaction sequence for compliance.


2010


739

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430

Figure 947: Controls integration

This integrated solution enhances the compliance of the consolidation and reporting process. Sarbanes-Oxley and other regulatory requirements in Governance, Risk and Compliance recognize that consolidation and reporting is an extremely important process that needs to be complied in the financial closing cycle. It automates the monitoring process without compromising compliance. This potentially decreases the manual efforts to be spent on internal controls and reduces the hours and cost of external auditing It automates the control and monitoring process and minimizes the manual intervention. This increases confidence in the effectiveness of control and compliance work for the consolidation process. It also reduces the risks and errors due to manual intervention. The Pre-packaged SAP BusinessObjects Process Control starter kit on the consolidation reporting process aims at “Driving Financial Excellence”. This first starter kit uses integration that will be delivered is targeted at consolidation and group reporting. Starter kits are based on best practice content and reduce the overall TCO (Total Cost of Ownership) by fast implementing the control-enabled group closing process.

740


2010

BPC430


Figure 948: Integration benefits

Figure 949: Integration prerequisites

Figure 950: Integration Archetecture

In SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5, version for SAP NetWeaver, automated checks can be built using transactional data and metadata. To build automated test plans within SAP BusinessObjects Process Controls, BEx Queries can be used within SAP BusinessObjects Process Controls to check SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation transactional data. SAP NetWeaver InfoSet Queries can be used to check SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation metadata such as journal entries or work status.

2010


741

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430

Figure 951: Set up and config overview

Figure 952: Set up and config: 1

Log into Query Designer: In Microsoft Windows, choose Start → All Programs → Business Explorer → Query Designer → Click the New Query pushbutton → choose InfoAreas → select the InfoCube → Drag and drop Key Figures in Columns Drag and drop dimensions in Rows → save the query.

742


2010

BPC430



To connect to SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation 7.5, version for SAP NetWeaver, you customize the Remote Function Call (RFC) in the Implementation Guide (IMG) of SAP BusinessObjects Process Control. Log into SAP BusinessObjects Process Control . To display the Implementation Guide (IMG)Use transaction SPRO → Choose IMG → GRC Process Control → Evaluation Setup → Assessment and Test → Automated Testing and Monitoring → Configure RFC Connectors In the ABAP connections → create a new connection → Choose the Create pushbutton → Check or enter information in the Technical Settings and Logon & Security tabs for your SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation System → Save your changes In the IMG → Register your connector → choose IMG → GRC Process Control → Evaluation Setup → Assessment and Test → Automated Testing and Monitoring → Register Connectors.

2010


743

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430


In SAP BusinessObjects Process Control, to connect to the BEx Query, use the rule scripting feature within the automated control framework. Log into SAP BusinessObjects Process Control → Choose Global Compliance Office → Global Evaluation Setup → Automated Test Customizing → select Rule Script and create a rule script → In the General tab → enter the Name and Description In the Script Type list → enter Business Warehouse → Enter the Target Connector, that is to say the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation system, the BEx query, and the Info Provider On the Script Criteria tab check the query data. All the dimensions and key figures build in the query should be available here.

744


2010

BPC430



Create automated testing rules in SAP BusinessObjects Process Control, and define the rule filter and deficiency criteria. Choose Global Compliance Office → Global Evaluation Setup → Automated Test Rules → Rule and click the Create pushbutton in the popup window. → In the General tab → enter the Name and Description → Select the rule script you have previously created → Select One Connector → enter the Single Connector Value. This represents the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation system In the Rule Status list, enter Released’ In the Rule Criteria tab, add your criteria Enter the deficiency accordingly and save the rule.

2010


745

Unit 11: Appendix

BPC430


Schedule the rules to be run in a recurring jobs. Choose SOX → Evaluation Setup → Automated Control Monitoring → Monitoring Scheduler. → Choose the Create Schedule pushbutton from the popup window → Enter the Job Name → enter the Frequency → Enter the Target Connector → To select controls for the rule, enter the Organization, Process, Subprocess, Control and Rule → Schedule the rule → To check the result, choose SOX → Evaluation Setup → Automated Control Monitoring → Job Monitor → . In Job Monitor window → to find the job → enter job parameters → Select the job to check → choose View Result.

746


2010

BPC430


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss GRC Integration.

2010


747

Unit Summary

BPC430

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Discuss GRC Integration.

748


2010

Test Your Knowledge

749

BPC430


2010

Course Summary

BPC430

Course Summary You should now be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

750

Understand the SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation concepts and components. Work with the delivered wizard templates. Use the 'evdre' range based function. Set up and run the distribution and collection wizard. Set up and run drill throughs. Use the spread, trend, and weight planning functions. Work with the Interfaces for Excel, Web, Word, and PowerPoint. Build and use Xcelsius dashboards for the purpose of integrating with SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consolidation. Configure the comments feature. Work with the MNU commands.


2010

Index

2010

A

R

Allocations, 302

Report Templates, 42

C

T

Characteristic Validation, 340 Control Panel, 44

Top Down Allocation, 300


751

Index

752

BPC430


2010

Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.

2010


753

BPC430_Col95

Recommend Documents